Download a FREE electronic copy of the Owner’s Manual

and Warranty Booklet by visiting:

WWW.RAMTRUCKS.COM/EN/OWNERS/MANUALS OR
WWW.RAMTRUCKS.COM/EN/WARRANTY (U.S.);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA/EN (CANADA).

15D241-926-AA
RAM TRUCKS 1500/2500/3500
SECOND REV 1 EDITION
USER GUIDE

1905562_15a_RAM_1500_2500_3500_UG_103114.indd 1 10/31/14 1:37 PM

 If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s acquainted with your new RAM and to provide a
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals or Warranty Booklet convenient reference source for common questions.
by calling 1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
by contacting your dealer.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please consult

IMPORTANT your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals and

This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

important features of your vehicle. The DVD enclosed Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your
contains your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help
Manuals, Warranty Booklets, Tire Warranty and Roadside personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
Assistance (new vehicles purchased in the U.S.) or Roadside www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local RAM dealer.
Assistance (new vehicles purchased in Canada) in electronic
format. We hope you find it useful. Replacement DVD kits
may be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Copyright 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes
of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a
personal injury. Chrysler Group LLC strongly recommends that the driver use
extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or
off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, use public transportation.
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision.
WARNING
Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. Never drink and then drive.

1905562_15a_RAM_1500_2500_3500_UG_103114.indd 2 10/31/14 1:37 PM

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME Uconnect® 8.4AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
WELCOME FROM CHRYSLER STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
GROUP LLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE CENTER (EVIC) OR DRIVER INFORMATION
DRIVER COCKPIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 DISPLAY (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . 8 PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES . . . . . . 149
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
GETTING STARTED (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
KEY FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 POWER INVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . 13 POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
REMOTE START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . 15
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED FOUR
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . 16 WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . 158
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS) — AIR BAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 UTILITY
CHILD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 TONNEAU COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 EASY-OFF TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . 161
FRONT SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 PICKUP BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
HEATED/VENTILATED SEATS . . . . . . . 31 RAMBOX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
HEATED STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . 33 TOWING & PAYLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . 168
TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . 34 TOW/HAUL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . 170
TURN SIGNALS/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH
BEAMS LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1500 3.0L DIESEL
HEADLIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 DIESEL ENGINE BREAK-IN
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . 39 RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 176
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC DIESEL ENGINE STARTING
TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . 41 PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
ELECTRONIC RANGE SELECT (ERS) DIESEL FUEL FILTER/WATER
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SEPARATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
1500 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM . . . . 44 EXHAUST REGENERATION . . . . . . . 179
2500-3500 AIR SUSPENSION COOL-DOWN IDLE CHART . . . . . . . . 180
SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 ADDING FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS WITHOUT ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
TOUCHSCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID . . . . . . . . 182
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS WITH
TOUCHSCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROLS WITH DIESEL ENGINE BREAK-IN
TOUCHSCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 186
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK DIESEL ENGINE STARTING
ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK-UP DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE
CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 (ENGINE BRAKING) . . . . . . . . . . . 188
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW . . . . 55 IDLE-UP FEATURE (AUTOMATIC
POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 TRANSMISSION ONLY) . . . . . . . . . 189
WIND BUFFETING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL FILTER/WATER
SEPARATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
ELECTRONICS UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM . . . 58 FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR . . . . . . . 191
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO . . . . . . . . 60 EXHAUST REGENERATION . . . . . . . 192
Uconnect® ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 COOL-DOWN IDLE CHART . . . . . . . . 194
Uconnect® 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 ADDING FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Uconnect® 8.4A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID . . . . . . . . 195
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . 252
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . 201 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE —
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING GASOLINE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE —
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INDICATOR 1500 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . 257
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE —
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . 208 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL ENGINE . . . 262
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . 209 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . 222 TIRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS . . . . . . . 225 SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . 271
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . 225 WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE . . . 273
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — EIGHT REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . 274
SPEED TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . 226
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . 228 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . 229 CHRYSLER GROUP LLC CUSTOMER
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . 230 CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CHRYSLER CANADA INC. CUSTOMER
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
OPENING THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . 231 ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . 232 IMPAIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
GAS FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . 244 PUBLICATIONS ORDERING . . . . . . . 275
GAS FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 UNITED STATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
1500 3.0 DIESEL FLUID
CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
1500 3.0 DIESEL FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY
AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 247 MOPAR® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL FLUID
CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 FAQ’s
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL FLUIDS, FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS . . . 278
LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

2
 INTRODUCTION/WELCOME

WELCOME FROM CHRYSLER GROUP LLC

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it
represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essen-
tials that are traditional to our vehicles.
Your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's
control under some driving conditions. These are to assist the driver and are never a
substitute for attentive driving. They can never take the driver's place. Always drive
carefully.
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these should not be used when driving because they take your
eyes from the road or your attention from driving. Never text while driving or take your
eyes more than momentarily off the road.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this
vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are
not available on this vehicle. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you quickly become acquainted with the
important features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate
and maintain the vehicle, including emergency information.
The DVD includes a computer application containing detailed owner's information
which can be viewed on a personal computer or MAC computer. The multimedia DVD
also includes videos which can be played on any standard DVD player (including the
Uconnect® Touchscreen Radios if equipped with DVD player capabilities). Additional
DVD operational information is located on the back of the DVD sleeve.
For complete owner information, refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD in the owner’s
kit provided at the time of new vehicle purchase. For your convenience, the information
contained on the DVD may also be printed and saved for future reference.
Chrysler Group LLC is committed to protecting our environment and natural re-
sources. By converting from paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the user
information for your vehicle, together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based
products and lessen the stress on our environment.

3
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be
deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
(excluding legal lines).

WARNING!
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase
the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause inter-
ference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever/
transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Never use the “PARK” position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement
and possible injury or damage.
• Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.

4
 INTRODUCTION/WELCOME

USE OF AFTERMARKET PRODUCTS (ELECTRONICS)

The use of aftermarket devices including cell phones, MP3 players, GPS systems, or
chargers may affect the performance of on-board wireless features including Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ and Remote Start range. If you are experiencing difficulties with any of
your wireless features, try disconnecting your aftermarket devices to see if the
situation improves. If your symptoms persist, please see an authorized dealer.
CHRYSLER, DODGE, JEEP, RAM, SRT, MOPAR and Uconnect are registered trade-
marks of Chrysler Group LLC.
COPYRIGHT ©2014 CHRYSLER GROUP LLC

5
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE

DRIVER COCKPIT

1. Headlight Switch pg. 38

2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Controls Or Driver Information
Display (DID) Controls pg. 148
3. Turn Signal/Wiper/Washer/High Beams Lever pg. 37
4. Instrument Cluster pg. 8
5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)
pg. 148
6. Electronic Speed Control pg. 39
7. Engine Starting/Stopping pg. 14
8. Four Wheel Drive Operation pg. 158
9. Uconnect® Radio pg. 60
10. Climate Controls pg. 49

6
 CONTROLS AT A GLANCE

11. Switch Panel

12. Power Inverter Outlet pg. 155
13. Glove Compartment
14. Power Outlet
15. Shifter
16. Hood Release (below steering wheel at base of instrument panel) pg. 231
17. Parking Brake Release
18. Power Windows
19. Power Door Locks
20. Power Mirrors

7
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Temperature Gauge
2. Tachometer
3. Voltmeter
(See page 201 for Instrument Cluster Warning Lights.)

8
 CONTROLS AT A GLANCE

4. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Or Driver Information Display (DID)

5. Oil Pressure Gauge
6. Speedometer
7. Fuel Gauge
(See page 207 for Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights.)

9
GETTING STARTED

KEY FOB
This feature allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a
button, as long as the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passen-
ger compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four
operating positions, three of which are
labeled and will illuminate when in posi-
tion. The three positions are OFF, ACC,
and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
START, during start RUN will illuminate.

Key Fob
1 — Air Suspension
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic

10
 GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the RKE
transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) oper-
ates similar to an ignition switch. It has
four operating positions, three with de-
tents and one that is spring-loaded. The
detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/
RUN. The START position is a spring-
loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position,
the switch automatically returns to the
ON/RUN position.

Locking And Unlocking The

Doors
Key Fob
Push and release the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter once to unlock the 1 — Lock
driver’s door. Push and release the UN- 2 — Unlock
LOCK button twice within five seconds to 3 — Remote Start
unlock all doors and the tailgate and the 4 — Emergency Key Release
RamBox® (if equipped). The turn signal 5 — Emergency Key
lights will flash to acknowledge the un-
lock signal. The illuminated entry system
will also turn on.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the UNLOCK button.
Refer to Programmable Features in this guide.

Panic Alarm
1. Push the PANIC button once to turn the panic alarm on.
2. Wait approximately three seconds and push the button a second time to turn the
panic alarm off.

11
GETTING STARTED

RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of Vehicle) —

x2

If Equipped
• This vehicle is equipped with a feature that can lower the vehicle to a height which
will improve ease of passenger entry/exit and cargo loading/unloading. The feature
is accessed by pushing the air suspension lowering button twice on the key fob.
• When remote key fob lowering is requested the vehicle will send a series of chirps
and flashes to alert the customer that the operation has begun and will continue
these alerts until it successfully lowers.
• If the feature is unable to lower the vehicle due to certain conditions not being
met, the horn will chirp twice and the vehicle will not lower.

Emergency Key
Should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob transmitter go dead, there is an
emergency key located in the Key Fob that can be used for locking and unlocking the
doors.
• To remove the emergency key, slide the button on the Key Fob with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.

WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be severely injured or killed. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal, or the transmission gear
selector. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could start the
vehicle, operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause them to be severely injured or killed.

12
 GETTING STARTED

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Key Fob. This
feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push Key
Fob lock or unlock buttons, as well as starting and stopping the vehicle with the push
of a button.

To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:

With a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
located outside the vehicle and within 5 ft
(1.5m) of the driver or passenger side door
handle, grab either front door handle to
unlock the door automatically.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:

With a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver or passenger front door handles, push door handle LOCK button to lock all
doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle lock button. This could
unlock the door(s).

Push The Button To Lock Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

13
GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you
can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done
to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the
vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the
lock button located on the vehicles interior door panel.

Engine Starting/Stopping
Starting
With a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key
Fob inside the vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission into PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. While pushing the brake pedal, push
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
If the engine fails to start, the starter
will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
Start/Stop Button
3. To stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the RKE
transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the Key Fob
(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Stopping
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The ignition switch will return to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
If the transmission is not in PARK and the vehicle is in motion, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds with the vehicle speed above
5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.

14
 GETTING STARTED

REMOTE START
x2
• Push REMOTE START button on the Key Fob twice within five seconds.
x2
Pushing the REMOTE START button a third time shuts the engine off.
• To drive the vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System (if equipped).
Then cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started with the Key Fob after two consecutive timeouts.

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause you or others to be severely injured or
killed when inhaled.
• Keep Key Fob transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause you and others to be
severely injured or killed.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the
following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.

To Arm:
• Lock the door using either the power door lock switch (one door must be open) or
the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be
open or closed), and close all doors.
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds. This
shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, or the power door locks are unlocked in any
manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
NOTE:
• The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door
lock plungers.
• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver
door trim panel and passenger door trim panel.

15
GETTING STARTED

To Disarm The System:

• Push the Key Fob UNLOCK button or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can
create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the
Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.

SEAT BELT SYSTEMS

Lap/Shoulder Belts
• All seating positions except the Quad Cab®, Mega Cab® and Crew Cab front center
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
• Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt.
To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt.
A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack
so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.

Center Lap Belts

The center seating position for the Quad Cab®, Mega Cab® and Crew Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.

16
 GETTING STARTED

Seat Belt Pretensioner

• The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are
designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
• A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and
others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear
your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you
could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disas-
semble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) — AIR BAGS

Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors (if equipped)
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

17
GETTING STARTED

Advanced Front Air Bags

• This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger
as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The Advanced Front Air Bags
will not deploy in every type of collision.
• Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by
supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
• The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
• On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front
Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that
produce a severe initial deceleration.
• Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed
and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
• Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed
to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
• The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and intercon-
necting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components.
• The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for
approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single
chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
• The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition
switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
• If the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel is not on during the four to
eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the vehicle serviced by an authorized
service center immediately.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
• Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
18
 GETTING STARTED
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
• Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details regarding the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

Supplemental Side Air Bags

• This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a SRS
AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
• This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled
SRS AIRBAG. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection
of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.
• The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to activate in certain side
impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side
impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.

WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be
severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a
collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
• This vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the
side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
• This vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as
intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.

19
GETTING STARTED

CHILD RESTRAINTS
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if
available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted
for ignoring it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.Seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

LATCH — Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(Crew/Quad Cab Full Bench)
• Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
• The rear outboard seating positions have lower anchors and top tether anchors.
The rear center seating position has a top tether anchor only.

LATCH – Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(Crew/Mega/Quad Cab Split Bench)
• Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
• All rear seating positions have lower anchors and top tether anchors.

LATCH System Weight Limit

You may use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

20
 GETTING STARTED

Locating The LATCH Lower Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear
seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along
the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Lower Anchors

Locating The Tether Anchorages

In addition, Regular Cab models have tether strap anchorages behind the front
center and right seats. Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have tether strap
anchorages located behind each of the rear seats.

Center Seat LATCH (Crew/Standard/Quad Cab Full And Standard

Bench)
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. Use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.

Center Seat LATCH (Crew/Mega/Quad Cab Split Bench)

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or
buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in
the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a
child seat in that outboard position.

21
GETTING STARTED

Installing The Child Restraint Using The LATCH Lower Anchors

NOTE:
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat
so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
3. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
below for directions to attach a tether anchor.
4. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.

Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Seat Belts

(Standard Cab)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time,
so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Seat Belts

(Crew/Mega/Quad Cab Full And Split Bench)
The seat belts in the outboard passenger seating positions are equipped with a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR). The center seating positions are
equipped with a cinching latch plate. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Tether Anchorage Weight Limit

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

To Install A Child Seat Using An ALR:

1. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
2. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
3. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
22
 GETTING STARTED
4. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to
retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
5. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able
to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat the last step.
6. Finally, pull up on any extra webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
7. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See below for directions to attach a tether anchor.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.

To Install A Child Seat Using A Cinching Latch Plate:

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the
belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See below for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.

Installing The Top Tether Strap (With Either Lower Anchors Or

Vehicle Seat Belt):
When installing a forward-facing child restraint, always secure the top tether strap,
up to the tether anchor weight limit, whether the child restraint is installed with the
lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt.

23
GETTING STARTED

Tether Anchorage Installation

Regular and Mega Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind the center and
right passenger seats. In the mega cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located
behind each rear seating position. There is a plastic cover over each anchorage.
To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head restraint and to the tether anchor directly
behind the seat.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and
the child seat. The tether strap should go between the head restraint posts
underneath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the head restraint to the
upward position to pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint and
between its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if equipped) and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet
metal. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Quad or Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located between the
rear glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind
each seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap of the child
restraint.
Right or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access
the tether strap loop.

Head Restraint In Raised Position Tether Strap Loop With Center Head
Restraint In Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind
the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.

24
 GETTING STARTED
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop.

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap

Loop

4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether
strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the
outboard (left and right) seating posi-
tions, the tether strap hooks of both child
seats should be connected to the center
tether strap loop. This is the correct way
to tether two outboard child seats.

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap

Loop And Attached To Center Tether Strap
Loop

25
GETTING STARTED
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access
the tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will
reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether
strap loop behind the seat and over to
the tether strap loop behind either the
right or left outboard seat.

Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In

Raised Position
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard tether
strap loop.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether
strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the
tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap

Loop

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap

Loop And Attached To Outboard Tether Strap
Loop

26
 GETTING STARTED
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each out-
board rear seat. Route the tether straps
following the directions for right and
left seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether
strap loop, but do not tighten the straps
yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear
seat. Route the tether strap following
the directions for the center seating po-
sition, above. Left Outboard And Center Seating Position
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether Shown
strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tightening the right and left tether straps before the center tether strap.

WARNING!
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury.

WARNING!
• In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a projectile
inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The
child and others could be severely injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
• Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with
a front passenger air bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death
to infants in this position.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. The child could be severely injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.

27
GETTING STARTED

HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head
movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly installed and adjusted prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be
adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.

Front Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head
restraint, press the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then press the release buttons
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes while pressing the release
buttons. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause
serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.

WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.

28
 GETTING STARTED

Rear Head Restraints

The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints. To raise the head
restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint, and push downward on
the head restraint.
NOTE:
• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad Cab) has only one adjustment
position that is used to aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” in the Owner's
Manual on the DVD.
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service
purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized
dealer.

FRONT SEATS
Power Seats
The seat switch controls forward/backward and up/down. The recline switch controls
the angle of the seatback.
• Push the switch forward or rearward and the seatback will move in either direction.
Power Lumbar
The lumbar controls are located on the
outboard side of the seat cushion.
• The lumbar support can be increased
by pressing the front of the switch and
decreased by pressing the back of the
switch.

Power Seat Switches

1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Recline Switch
3 — Power Lumbar Switch

29
GETTING STARTED

Memory Seat
The memory seat feature allows you to save the driver's seat position (excluding lumbar
position), driver's outside mirror position, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals,
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) temperature setting and radio station preset
settings. The driver's memory buttons are located on the outboard side of the driver's
seat cushion.
• Adjust all memory profile settings,
press the middle button S (SET), then
press 1 or 2 within five seconds.
• To program a Key Fob to the memory
position, place the ignition switch in
the LOCK position and remove the Key
Fob, press and release the LOCK but-
ton on the Key Fob to be programmed
within five seconds of pressing
button 1 or 2.
• Press 1 or 2 to recall the saved posi-
tions, or press UNLOCK on the pro-
grammed Key Fob.
Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD Memory Seat Button Location
for further details.

Manual Seats
Forward/Rearward
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the
front of the seat near the floor and release
it when the seat is at the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward
and backward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
Recliner
Lift the recliner lever located on the out-
board side of the seat, lean back and
release at the desired position.

Manual Seat Adjusting Bar/Recline Lever

1 — Recline Lever
2 — Adjusting Bar

30
 GETTING STARTED

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may
cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden
movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not
be properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a
seat while the vehicle is parked.
• Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to swing forward. Do not
stand or lean in front of the seatback while actuating the handle. The seatback
may swing forward and strike you, causing injury. To avoid possible injury, place
your hand on the seatback while actuating the recliner handle.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be
severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

HEATED/VENTILATED SEATS
Front Ventilated Seats
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and pull air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate
at two speeds, HIGH and LOW.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument
panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front ventilated seats control
buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HIGH.
• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LOW.
• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.

31
GETTING STARTED
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, this feature can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the
Owner's Manual on the DVD.

Front Heated Seats

The front heated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument
panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front heated seats control buttons
are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the High setting On.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the Low setting On.
• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements Off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level
during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically
switch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level
setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.

Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, this feature can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the
Owner's Manual on the DVD.

32
 GETTING STARTED

REAR HEATED SEATS

The rear heated seat switches are located on the rear of the center console.
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the High setting On.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the Low setting On.
• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements Off.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level
during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to
LOW-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The
LOW-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater.
It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods
of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL

The steering wheel contains a heating element that heats the steering wheel to one
temperature setting.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center instrument
panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the heated steering wheel control
button is located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element On.
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating
element Off.
Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for approximately
30 to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can
shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.

33
GETTING STARTED
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, this feature can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the
Owner's Manual on the DVD.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.

TILT STEERING COLUMN

The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the turn signal lever.
• To tilt the column, simply pull the tilt
lever rearward toward you and then
move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired.
• Release the tilt lever to lock the steer-
ing wheel into position.

Tilt Lever Location

1 — Adjustable Pedal Switch
2 — Tilt Lever

34
 GETTING STARTED

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
Press the switch located on the left side of the steering column forward to move the
brake and accelerator pedals away from the driver and press the switch rearward to
move the pedals closer to the driver.
NOTE:
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
Electronic Speed Control is set.

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move,
as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's path.

WARNING!
• Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Without
a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is
locked before driving.
• Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and
have a collision. Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.

35
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and
axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles
(100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws
contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy
conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity
and quality grades, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers)
of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of an engine problem or malfunction.

CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.

DIESEL ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

• For 3.0L diesel engine break-in recommendations, refer to Diesel Engine Break-In
Recommendations on pg. 176
• For 6.7L Cummins diesel engine break-in recommendations, refer to Diesel
Engine Break-In Recommendations on pg. 186

36
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

TURN SIGNALS/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAMS LEVER

Turn Signal/Wiper/Washer/High Beam Lever

Turn Signals/Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times
and automatically turn off.

Wipers
Intermittent, Low And High Operation
• Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of five intermittent
settings, the second detent for low wiper operation and the third detent for high
wiper operation.
Washer Operation
• Push the end of the lever inward to the second detent and hold for as long as spray
is desired.
Mist Feature
• When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle is needed,
push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off.

High Beams
• Push the lever away from you to activate the high beams.
A high beam symbol will illuminate in the cluster to indicate the high beams are on.
NOTE:
For safe driving, turn off the high beams when oncoming traffic is present to prevent
headlight glare and as a courtesy to other motorists.

37
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Automatic Headlights/Parking
Lights/Headlights
• Rotate the headlight switch, located on
the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel, to the first detent
for parking lights and to the second
detent for headlights .
• With the parking lights or low beam
headlights on, push the headlight
switch once for fog lights.
• Rotate the headlight switch to AUTO
for Automatic headlights.
• When set to AUTO, the system auto-
matically turns the headlights on or off Headlight Switch
based on ambient light levels. 1 — Auto
Automatic High Beams 2 — Rotate Headlight Switch
3 — Push Cargo Light
The Automatic High Beams system pro- 4 — Rotate Dimmer
vides increased forward lighting at night 5 — Push Fog Light
by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted
above the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle
is out of view. This feature is programmable through the Uconnect® system. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's
Manual on the DVD for further details.

Instrument Panel Dimmer

• Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme left position to fully dim the instrument
panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is
opened.
• Rotate the dimmer control right to increase the brightness of the instrument panel
when the parking lights or headlights are on.
• Rotate the dimmer control right to the next detent position to fully brighten the
odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
• Rotate the dimmer control right to the last detent position to turn on the interior
lighting.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the dimming is programmable
through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings ” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.

38
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Cargo Light
The cargo light is strategically placed lighting that helps illuminate the bed area of
the truck. A cargo light symbol will illuminate in the cluster to indicate the light is on.
• Push the button to turn ON/OFF the cargo lighting.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

The Electronic Speed Control switches are located on the steering wheel.

Electronic Speed Control Switches

1 — Push CANCEL
2 — Push ON/OFF
3 — Push Resume/Accel
4 — Push Set/Decel

Cruise ON/OFF
• Push the ON/OFF switch to activate the Speed Control.
The cruise symbol will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the Speed
Control is on.
• Push the ON/OFF switch a second time to turn the system off.

Set
• With the Speed Control on, push and release the SET/DECEL switch to set a
desired speed.

39
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Accel/Decel
To Increase Speed
• When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
RES + button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until
the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until
the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
• When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET - button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until
the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until
the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

40
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Resume
• To resume a previously selected set speed in memory, push the RESUME/ACCEL
switch and release.

Cancel
• Push the CANCEL switch or apply the brakes to cancel the set speed and maintain
the set speed memory.
• Push the ON/OFF switch to turn the system off and erase the set speed memory.

WARNING!
• Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous.
You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the Electronic Speed
Control system off when you are not using it.
• Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain
a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. A collision could be the result. Do not use Electronic Speed
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.

EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

• Your vehicle may be equipped with a
fuel efficient eight-speed transmis-
sion. The electronic transmission gear
selector is located on the instrument
panel. The transmission gear (PRND)
is displayed both above the shifter con-
trol and in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID).
• To select a gear range, simply rotate
the shifter control.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal to shift
the transmission out of PARK or from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE. Rotary Gear Selector
• To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as Park to Drive), simply rotate the switch to the appropriate detent.
• Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

41
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRONIC RANGE SELECT (ERS) OPERATION

• Electronic Range Select (ERS) allows
you to limit the highest available trans-
mission gear, and can be activated during
any driving condition. When towing a
trailer or operating the vehicle in off-road
conditions, using ERS shift control will
help you maximize both performance and
engine braking.
• Move the console shift lever left (-) or
right (+), or toggle the switch on the
column shift lever down (-) or up (+) to
select the desired top gear.

ERS Control Position

ERS Control On The Shift Lever

• For maximum deceleration (engine braking) move the console shift lever left (-) and
hold, or toggle the switch on the column shift lever down (-) and hold. Your vehicle will
automatically select the lowest safe gear for optimal engine braking.
• To disable ERS, push and hold the console shift lever to the right (+) or push and
hold the column shift lever switch up (+) until “D” is displayed in the odometer.
• Switching between ERS and DRIVE mode can be done at any vehicle speed.
• Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.

42
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRONIC RANGE SELECT (ERS) OPERATION — EIGHT-SPEED

TRANSMISSION
• The Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control allows the driver to limit
the highest available gear when the
transmission shifter switch is in the
DRIVE position
• You can switch between DRIVE and
ERS mode at any vehicle speed.
• Tapping the ERS (-) switch (on the
steering wheel) will activate ERS mode.
• Once in ERS mode, tapping the ERS
(-) or (+) switch will change the top
available gear.
• To exit ERS mode, simply press and
hold the ERS (+) switch until “D” is
ERS Control
once again displayed in the transmis-
sion gear position indicator in the in-
strument cluster.

43
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

1500 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM

The air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the
benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle
height. The indicator lamps and EVIC/DID messages will operate the same for
automatic changes and user requested changes.

Description
Normal Ride Height (NRH) - This is the
standard position of the suspension and
is meant for normal driving.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle ap-
proximately 1 in (26 mm) - This position
should be the primary position for all
off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2) is
needed. A smoother and more comfort- 1500 Air Suspension Controls
able ride will result. To enter OR1, press
the “Up” button once from the NRH 1 — Off-Road 1 Indicator
position while the vehicle speed is below 2 — Off-Road 2 Indicator
35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1 3 — Up Button
4 — Down Button
position, if the vehicle speed remains
5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph
6 — Normal Ride Height Indicator
(80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or
if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph
(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automati-
cally lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may not be available due to vehicle payload, an
EVIC/DID message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately 2 in (51 mm) - This position is
intended for off-roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, press the “Up” button twice from the NRH position or once from the OR1
position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID message
will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.

44
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in (15 mm) – 1500 Models Only - This
position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will
automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode
if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle settings in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) when equipped
with Uconnect 3.0, or your Uconnect® Radio when equipped with UConnect® 5.0,
8.4A, or 8.4AN.
Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 2 in (51 mm) - This position lowers the
vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for
easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Down”
button once from the NHR while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the
vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the
vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater
than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change
will be cancelled. To return to Normal Height Mode, press the “Up” button once while
in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be
available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID message will be displayed when this
occurs. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information
Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" in the Owner’s Manual on the
DVD for further information.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further details.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique
situations:
Tire Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which
allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

45
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has a feature which will put
the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD
for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further
information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Protection Mode
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle will enter Protection
Mode when the payload has been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD
for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

46
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

2500-3500 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM

The air suspension system provides full time rear load leveling capability for all
loading conditions including towing.

Description
Normal Ride Height (NRH) - This is the
standard position of the suspension and
is meant for normal driving.
Trailer Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 1 in (25 mm) - This position will
lower the rear suspension and provide
load leveling for all loading conditions
including towing a trailer. After the “ALT Alt Trailer Height Button
TRAILER HEIGHT” button has been
pushed, it will blink continuously until the trailer height has been achieved. The
system requires that the ignition be in the ON/RUN position or the engine running
with zero vehicle speed for all user requested changes. After the engine is turned off,
it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading - The air suspension system will load level (lower/
exhaust only) for up to 10 minutes after the vehicle is turned off. This allows for easy
removal of a trailer and/or load from the back of the truck by maintaining the ride
height. After 10 minutes you will need to turn the ignition to the run position for the
air suspension to maintain ride height. If the air suspension system is disabled using
the settings menu (Tire Jack Mode, Transport Mode or Alignment Mode) the system
will remain disabled when the vehicle is turned off. Reactivating the air suspension
can be accomplished via the settings menu or driving the vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h) for Tire Jack Mode or Alignment Mode and 16 mph (26 km/h) for Transport
Mode.
NOTE:
While loading, engine must be running for air suspension to maintain the ride height.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further details.

47
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique
situations:
Tire Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which
allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has a feature which will put
the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD
for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further
information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Protection Mode
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle will enter Protection
Mode when the payload has been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD
for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

48
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS WITHOUT TOUCHSCREEN

Manual Climate Controls

1 — Rotate Blower Control 4 — Push A/C Button
2 — Push Air Recirculation Button 5 — Rotate Mode Control
3 — Rotate Temperature Control 6 — Push Defroster Button

Air Recirculation /Max A/C

• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.
• Recirculation is not allowed in defrost.
• Recirculation is allowed in floor mode and defrost/floor (mix modes) for approxi-
mately five minutes.

Heated Mirrors
The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn
on the defroster.

49
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS WITH TOUCHSCREEN

Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Climate Controls

1 — Max A/C Indicator 6 — Blower Speed Up Button
2 — A/C Button 7 — Mode Control Buttons
3 — Air Recirculation Button 8 — Blower Speed Down Button
4 — Front Defroster Button 9 — OFF Button
5 — Rear Defroster Button 10 — Temperature Control Buttons

50
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Climate Control Knobs

1 — A/C Button 5 — Rotate Blower Control
2 — Temperature Control Buttons 6 — OFF Button
3 — Front Defroster Button 7 — Air Recirculation Button
4 — Rear Defroster Button

Air Recirculation
• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.

Heated Mirrors
The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn
on the defroster.

51
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROLS WITH TOUCHSCREEN

Touchscreen Automatic Climate Controls

1 — MAX A/C Button 8 — Passenger Temperature Down
2 — A/C Button 9 — SYNC Button
3 — Air Recirculation Button 10 — Blower Control Buttons
4 — AUTO Button 11 — Mode Control Button
5 — Front Defroster Button 12 — OFF Button
6 — Rear Defroster Button 13 — Driver Temperature Down
7 — Passenger Temperature Up 14 — Driver Temperature Up

52
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Climate Control Knobs

1 — A/C Button 7 — Rear Defroster Button
2 — Driver Temperature Up 8 — Passenger Temperature Down
3 — OFF Button 9 — AUTO Button
4 — Blower Control Knob 10 — Driver Temperature Down
5 — Passenger Temperature Up 11 — Recirculation Button
6 — Front Defroster Button

Air Conditioning (A/C)

• If the air conditioning button is pressed while in AUTO mode, the system will exit
AUTO mode and stay in A/C. The mode and blower will be set at the closest mode
and blower position that the system was operating in AUTO.

SYNC Temperature Button

• Press the “SYNC” button on the Uconnect® radio touchscreen to control the driver
and passenger temperatures simultaneously. Press the “SYNC” button on the
touchscreen a second time to control the temperatures individually.

53
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Recirculation
• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.
• If the Recirculation button is pushed while in the AUTO mode, the indicator light
may flash three times to indicate the cabin air is being controlled automatically.

Heated Mirrors
The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn
on the defroster.

PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST

ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled by pressing the ParkSense® switch located
below the climate controls, on the switch panel.
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in
front of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm) from the front
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
When an object is detected within 2 meters behind the rear bumper while the vehicle
is in REVERSE, a warning will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). In addition a chime will sound (when
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect® System screen). As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the chime
rate will change from single 1/2 second tone (for rear only), to slow (for rear only), to
fast, to continuous.
Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.

Cleaning The ParkSense® Sensors

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)”, clean the ParkSense® sensors
with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

54
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

PARKVIEW® REAR BACK-UP CAMERA

• You can see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The ParkView® Rear Back-Up Camera image
will be displayed in the rearview mirror or touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear.
• If the rearview mirror or touchscreen display appears foggy, clean the ParkView®
camera located to the left of the tailgate handle.

WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up; even when using the ParkView® Rear
Back-Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.

POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW

The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on the overhead console.
• Push the switch right to open the glass
and pull the switch left to close the
glass.

Power Sliding Rear Window Switch

55
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

POWER SUNROOF
• The power sunroof switch is located on
the overhead console.

Opening Sunroof
Express Open
Press the switch rearward and release it
within one-half second. The sunroof will
fully open and stop automatically.
Manual Open
Press and hold the switch rearward to
open the sunroof. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement, and the
sunroof will remain in a partially open
position until the switch is pressed again. Power Sunroof Switch

Venting Sunroof
1 — Opening Sunroof
Press and release the button and the 2 — Venting Sunroof
sunroof will open to the vent position. 3 — Closing Sunroof
This is called “Express Vent” and will
occur regardless of sunroof position. Dur-
ing Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof
Express Closing
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will fully
close automatically from any position.
Manual Closing
Press and hold the switch forward to close the sunroof. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement, and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed position until the
switch is pressed again.

56
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Pinch Protection Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express
Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof
will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the
switch forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the
fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.

WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof. Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not leave the Key Fob in or
near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open
sunroof. You could also be severely injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,
other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.

WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as a helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, adjust the front and rear windows together.
If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any
window. This will minimize buffeting.

57
ELECTRONICS

YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM

1. Uconnect® Voice Command Button pg. 111

2. Uconnect® Phone Button pg. 139
3. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Left) pg. 147
4. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Right) pg. 147
5. Volume Knob/Audio Mute Button
6. Assist Button pg. 69

58
 ELECTRONICS

7. 9-1-1 Button pg. 69

8. Uconnect® 8.4 Radio pg. 95
9. Screen Off Button
10. Back Button
11. Tune/Scroll Knob/Browse/Enter Button
12. Media Hub: Audio Jack, USB Port, and SD Card Slot (located center console)
pg. 101
13. CD Player (Inside Center Console — If Equipped) pg. 131

59
ELECTRONICS

IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO

Uconnect® 3.0
• Two buttons on the faceplate on either
side of the display

Uconnect® 3.0

Uconnect® 5.0
• 5” Touchscreen
• Three buttons on the faceplate on ei-
ther side of the display

Uconnect® 5.0

Uconnect® 8.4A
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• Climate button on the touchscreen in
lower menu bar
• HD Button will NOT be visible on right
side of screen when viewing AM or FM
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature NOT listed
within Apps

Uconnect® 8.4A

60
 ELECTRONICS
Uconnect® 8.4AN
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• Climate button on the touchscreen in
lower menu bar
• HD Button will be visible on right side
of screen when viewing AM or FM
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature listed
within Apps

Uconnect® 8.4AN
1 — HD Radio — Standard On
Uconnect® 8.4AN
2 — Navigation — Standard On
Uconnect® 8.4AN

Uconnect® ACCESS
Uconnect® Access — If Equipped (Available On Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN — U.S. Residents Only)

WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect® features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect® when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

Uconnect® Access enhances your ownership and driving experience by connecting

your vehicle with a built-in cellular connection. With Uconnect® Access, you can:
• Place a call to a local 9-1-1 Operator for emergency assistance.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your vehicle from virtually anywhere,
using the Uconnect® Access App from your smartphone. You can also do so by
logging into Mopar Owner Connect, or by calling Uconnect® Care. (Vehicle must be
within the United States and have network coverage).
• Turn your vehicle into a WiFi Hotspot and connect your devices to the internet.
• Receive text or email notifications if your vehicle's theft alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS technology to help authorities locate
your vehicle if it is stolen.

61
ELECTRONICS
• Listen to your text messages or send free-form text messages with your voice while
keeping your hands on the wheel, using the Voice Texting feature. Requires a cell
phone that supports Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP).
• Search for places to eat, shop, relax and play with Yelp®, using your voice or
on-screen menu. Then navigate to them (navigation standard on Uconnect®
8.4AN, optional on Uconnect® 8.4A).
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST button on your interior rearview mirror.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use Uconnect® Access.
1. The ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons are located on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST
button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect®
Care. The 9-1-1 button connects you to emergency services.

NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities. 9-1-1
or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to
9-1-1 system calls.
2. The Uconnect® “Apps” button on the menu bar at the bottom right corner of the
radio touchscreen. This is where you can begin your registration process, manage
your Apps and purchase WiFi on demand.
3. The Uconnect® Voice Command and Uconnect® Phone buttons are located on the
left side of your steering wheel. These buttons let you use your voice to give
commands, make phone calls, send and receive text messages hands-free, enter
navigation destinations, and control your radio and media devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the Uconnect®
Access Services starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales
notification from your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first register with
Uconnect® Access. After the trial period, if you wish to continue your Uconnect®
Access Services you can choose to purchase a subscription.
Features And Packages
• After the trial period, you can subscribe to continue your service by visiting
the Uconnect® Store located within the Mopar Owner Connect website
moparownerconnect.com. If you need assistance, U.S. residents can call
Uconnect® Care at 1-855-792-4241.
• For the latest information on packages and pricing information: U.S. residents
visit DriveUconnect.com.

62
 ELECTRONICS

Uconnect® Access Registration (Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN,

U.S. 48 Contiguous States, Alaska And Hawaii)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect® Access in your vehicle, you first need to
register with Uconnect® Access.
1. From the parked vehicle with the radio touchscreen powered on, select the
“Apps” button located near the bottom right-hand corner of the radio touch-
screen.
NOTE:
Should you require assistance anytime during the registration process, simply call
Uconnect® Care at 1-855-792-4241.
2. Press “Start” on the reminder screen or select “Uconnect Registration” under the
“All Apps” or “Favorites Apps” tab on the Apps list.
3. The Uconnect® Access Registration App will open and display step-by-step
instructions to start your registration.
4. Enter your email address into the radio touchscreen.
5. A message will display on the touchscreen indicating your email submission was
accepted. In a few minutes, you will receive an email which will allow you to
register your vehicle for Uconnect® Access. You should open this email and begin
your Uconnect® Access registration within 72 hours.
6. Check for an email from Uconnect® Access that contains your personalized
registration link. If you don't see it, check your spam or junk mail folder. Open the
email and click on the link to continue registering.
NOTE:
For security reasons, this link is valid for 72 hours from the time you’ve submitted
your email address into the radio touchscreen. If the link has expired, simply re-enter
your email address into the Uconnect® Registration App on the radio touchscreen to
receive another link. The secured registration link will take you through the
Uconnect® Access registration process step by step.
7. To unlock the full potential of Uconnect® Access in your vehicle, you will need to
create or validate an existing Mopar Owner Connect account previously (Owner
Center). Uconnect® along with Mopar Owner Connect have joined forces to create
one destination to manage all of your vehicle needs, from managing your
Uconnect® Access account, to tracking service history and finding recommended
accessories for your vehicle. If you already have a Mopar Owner Connect account,
log in to the website with your existing username/email and password. For
assistance with this web based registration process, call Uconnect® Care at
1-855-792-4241.

63
ELECTRONICS
8. Once you are logged in to your Mopar Owner Connect account, you will create a
personal Uconnect® Security PIN. The Uconnect® Security PIN will be required
to authenticate you when accessing your account via Uconnect® Care or perform-
ing any remote services such as Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & Lights
or Starting and Stopping the engine.
9. If your vehicle qualifies for a trial package it will be presented. Simply agree to the
Uconnect® Terms of Service (checkbox) and then select the “Start Service”
button.
At this point your vehicle is registered with Uconnect® Access. Continue to set up Via
Mobile. Apps will be downloaded the next time you start your vehicle. If the Apps
have not appeared after 24 hours, please contact Uconnect® Care.

Download The Uconnect® Access App

The Uconnect® Access smartphone App allows you to remotely lock or unlock your doors,
start your engine (if equipped) and activate your horn and lights from virtually anywhere.
The smartphone App also features Via Mobile (if equipped) which uses your smartphone’s
data plan to access your personal Pandora®, iHeartRadio, Slacker Radio and Aha™ by
HARMAN accounts and control them using your vehicle touchscreen.
The Uconnect® Access app is only compatible with select iPhone® and Android
smartphones. Visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400 to confirm that
your smartphone is compatible with Uconnect®. Once you’ve confirmed your smart-
phone is compatible, Android and iPhone® users should visit their respective app
store and search for “Uconnect Access” to download the app.

Set Up Your Via Mobile Profile — If Equipped

Setting up your Via Mobile profile means entering your login information for each App
so that they can work in your vehicle. Complete your Via Mobile Profile online during
registration of your Uconnect® Access system. Access this page by logging into your
Mopar Owner Connect account (moparownerconnect.com), going to Edit Profile,
then Via Mobile Profile.
If you already have an account with these Apps, scroll down and press the “Link” button
to enter your information. If you do not have an account, you can create a new one.
Aha™ by HARMAN (www.aharadio.com)
• Enter your email address and password for Aha™, or create a new Aha™ account.
• You can link your Facebook, Twitter or Slacker accounts on the Aha™ website.
iHeartRadio (www.iHeartRadio.com)
• Enter your email address and password for iHeartRadio, or create a new iHeart-
Radio account.
• Select “Activate” to continue,
• Select “Close” to complete activation.
64
 ELECTRONICS
Pandora® (www.pandora.com)
• Enter your Pandora® username/email address and password, then click “Save.”
• Create a new Pandora® account.
Slacker Radio (www.slacker.com)
• Enter your Slacker username/email address and password, then click “Save.”
• Create a new Slacker Radio account.
Invite family and friends to use the Via Mobile Apps in your vehicle by setting up their
own Via Mobile profile.

Renewing Subscriptions And Purchasing WiFi Hotspot

(Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN, U.S. 48 Contiguous States And
Alaska)
Subscriptions, and WiFi Hotspot, can be purchased from the Uconnect® Store within your
vehicle, and online at Mopar Owner Connect. If you need help push the ASSIST button on
the rearview mirror, then select Uconnect® Care (or dial 1-855-792-4241).
Purchasing Online
You can renew your subscription to a package or purchase WiFi from the Mopar Owner
Connect website. You must first set up a Uconnect® Access Payment Account online.
Log into moparownerconnect.com
1. Log In to the Mopar Owner Connect website (moparownerconnect.com) with your
username/email and password.
2. Click on the “Shop” tab, then click on the Uconnect® Store.
3. From the Uconnect® Store, select the item you wish to purchase.
4. This will launch the selected item into purchase mode along with providing
additional information.
5. The Uconnect® Store will display a “Purchase Overview” message confirming the
financial details of your purchase. Click the “Purchase” key to continue.
6. The Uconnect® Store will ask you to “Confirm Payment” using your default
payment method on file in your Payment Account. Click the “Complete” key to
continue.
7. The Uconnect® Payment Account will then ask for your “Payment Account PIN,”
which you established when setting up your Uconnect® payment account. After
entering this four digit PIN, click the “Complete” key to make the purchase.
8. You will receive a confirmation message that your purchase has been submitted.
Click the “OK” button to end the process.

65
ELECTRONICS
Purchasing WiFi Hotspot While In Your Vehicle
You must set up a Uconnect® Access Payment Account online (log in to
moparownerconnect.com, go to Edit Profile, then Uconnect® Payment Account, to
set up and manage your Payment Account).
1. To purchase WiFi while in your vehicle, ensure the vehicle is running and in Park.
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then select WiFi within the “Apps”
menu. Follow the on-screen instructions. When asked for your payment PIN, use
the 4-digit PIN you established when setting up your payment account on Mopar
Owner Connect.
NOTE:
This may be different than the Uconnect® Security PIN you established for using
features such as Remote Vehicle Start. After purchasing WiFi, it may take up to
30 minutes (with the vehicle running) before the WiFi will be active in your vehicle.
2. Select WiFi again, then note the hotspot name. Select this network when
connecting devices to the hotspot. Also click on View/Edit Passphrase, then note
the security passphrase you will need to connect to the network on each device.
If your devices cannot see the WiFi Hotspot network after 30 minutes, please contact
Uconnect® Care by pushing the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, or by calling
1-855-792-4241.

Using Uconnect® Access

Getting Started With Apps
Applications (Apps) and features in your Uconnect® Access system deliver services
that are customized for the driver and are certified by Chrysler Group, LLC. Two
different types are:
1. Built-In Features — use the built-in 3G Cellular Network on your Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN radio.
2. Uconnect® Access Via Mobile (if equipped) — Via Mobile uses the Uconnect®
Access App and your smartphone's data plan to access your personal Pandora®,
iHeartRadio, Aha™ by HARMAN and Slacker Radio accounts from the vehicle
and control them using the vehicle touchscreen. Customer’s data plan charges
will apply. Available on Uconnect® 8.4A and 8.4AN Radios (if equipped).

66
 ELECTRONICS
Get started with your Uconnect® Access apps by pressing the Uconnect® “Apps”
button on the menu bar at the bottom right corner of the radio touchscreen. Available
apps and features are organized by the tabs on the left of the screen:
Favorite Apps — This is the default screen when you first press the “Apps” button on
the touchscreen, and is a good place to put the apps you use most frequently.
To make an App a “favorite”, press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to the
right of the app, and select “Make a favorite.”
All Apps — Organizes your Uconnect® Access Apps (when available).
Running Apps — Press this tab to see which apps are currently running.

Favorite Apps
1 — Category Tabs 2 — Apps Button

67
ELECTRONICS

Maintaining Your Uconnect® Access Account

Reinstalling An App (Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN)
You can easily correct many Application related issues you may be experiencing by
resetting the App back to the factory setting. From the vehicle’s radio touchscreen,
complete the following steps:
1. Press the Uconnect® “Apps” button and open the Uconnect® Store. Go to My
Apps.
2. In My Apps, select “Settings,” then “Reinstall App.” Press “Continue.”
3. Your Apps have been successfully re-installed.
Canceling Your Subscription
Should you want to cancel your subscription, you can remove your account informa-
tion using the same procedure contained in the Selling Your Vehicle section.
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that you remove your Uconnect® Access
Account information from the vehicle. You can do this using the radio touchscreen in
the vehicle or on the Mopar Owner Connect website (moparownerconnect.com).
Removing your account information cancels your subscription and makes your
vehicle factory-ready for a new owner/subscriber.
1. From your vehicle’s radio touchscreen, select “Uconnect® Store” from the Apps
Menu.
2. Select “My Apps,” then “Settings.” Press “Remove Uconnect® Account.”
3. Enter your Uconnect® Security PIN, and select “Continue.”
For additional information on Uconnect®:
• U.S. residents - visit DriveUconnect.com or call 1-877-855-8400.
• Canadian Residents - visit DriveUconnect.ca or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English)
or 1-800-387-9983 (French).

68
 ELECTRONICS

Built-In Features (Uconnect® 8.4AN Only)

CAUTION!
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you may not have 9-1-1 Call
service if needed. If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on
the instrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the air bag
system. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not
be working properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to send a signal to
a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to
a safe location.
• Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (IN-
CLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT® FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.

1. Assist Call – The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST push button which auto-
matically connects the vehicle occupants to one of these predefined destinations
for immediate support:
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you
get a flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be
connected to someone who can help
anytime. Additional fees may apply.
Additional information in this sec-
tion.
• Uconnect® Access Care — In ve-
hicle support for Uconnect® Access
System, Apps and Features.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for
ASSIST/9-1-1 Buttons
your Chrysler Group LLC vehicle.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — 9-1-1 Button

69
ELECTRONICS
2. Emergency 9-1-1 Call (If Equipped) — The rearview mirror contains a 9-1-1 button
that, when pressed, may place a call from your vehicle to a local 9-1-1 operator
to request help from local police, fire or ambulance personnel. If this button is
accidentally pressed, you will have 10 seconds to stop the call. To cancel, press
the 9-1-1 Call button again or press the “Cancel” button shown on the touch-
screen. After 10 seconds has passed, the 9-1-1 call will be placed and only the
9-1-1 operator can cancel it. The LED light on the rearview mirror will turn green
once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made. The green LED light will
turn off once the 9-1-1 call is terminated. Have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle if the rearview mirror light is continuously red. On equipped vehicles, this
feature requires a functioning electrical system and wireless coverage to function
properly. If a connection is made between a 9-1-1 operator and your vehicle, you
understand and agree that 9-1-1 operators may, like any other 9-1-1 call, record
conversations and sounds in and near your vehicle upon connection.
3. Roadside Assistance (If Equipped) — If your vehicle is equipped with this feature
and within wireless range, you may be able to connect to Roadside Assistance by
pressing the “ASSIST” button on the rearview mirror. You will be presented with
Assist Care options. Make a selection by pressing the prompts displayed on the
radio. If Roadside Assistance is provided to your vehicle, you agree to be
responsible for any additional roadside assistance service costs that you may
incur. In order to provide Uconnect® Services to you, we may record and monitor
your conversations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect® Care or Vehicle Care,
whether such conversations are initiated through the Uconnect® Services in your
vehicle, or via a landline or mobile telephone, and may share information
obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording, monitoring
or sharing of information obtained through any such call recordings.
4. Yelp® — Customers have the ability to search for nearby destinations or a point
of interest (POI) either by category or custom search by using keywords (for
example, “Italian restaurant”). Searching can be done by either voice or by using
the touchscreen keypad. Using the touchscreen, launch Yelp® by selecting the
“Apps” icon. Press the “All Apps” tab, and then press “Yelp.” To use voice
recognition, push the VR button on the steering wheel and say “launch Yelp®,”
then follow the instructions on the Teleprompter.
5. Security Alarm Notification — The Security Alarm Notification feature notifies you
via email or text (SMS) message when the vehicle’s factory-installed security
alarm system has been set-off. There are a number of reasons why your alarm may
have been triggered, one of which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so,
please see the details of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When you
register, Security Alarm Notification is automatically set to send you an email at
the mail address you provide should the alarm go off. You may also opt to have a
text message sent to your mobile device.

70
 ELECTRONICS
6. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforce-
ment immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this report has been filed,
Uconnect® care can help locate your vehicle. The Uconnect® Care agent will ask
for the stolen vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. Then, using
GPS technology and the built-in wireless connection within your vehicle, the
Uconnect® Care agent will be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work with law
enforcement to help recover it. (Vehicle must be within the United States, have
network coverage and must be registered with Uconnect® Access with an active
subscription that includes the applicable feature).
7. WiFi Hotspot — WiFi Hotspot is on-demand WiFi 3G connectivity that's built-in
and ready to go where ever you are. Once your vehicle is registered for Uconnect®
Access, you can purchase a Wifi Hotspot subscription at the Uconnect® Store.
After you've made your purchase, turn on your signal and connect your passengers
devices. It's never been easier to bring your home or office with you.

NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system for any of the in vehicle
Uconnect® features to operate.

Uconnect® Access Remote Features

If you own a compatible iPhone® or Android® powered device, the Uconnect® Access App
allows you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your engine or activate your horn and
lights from virtually anywhere (Vehicle must be within the United States and have network
coverage). You can download the App from Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store
(iPhone) or Google Play store. Visit UconnectPhone.com to determine if your device is
compatible. For Uconnect® Phone customer support and to determine if your device
is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400
Remote Start — This feature provides the ability to start the engine on your vehicle,
without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to your
vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect® Access App from a compatible smartphone.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
will shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-off an engine that has been remote
started.
• This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factory-
installed Remote Start system. To utilize this feature after the Uconnect®
Access App is downloaded, login with your user name and password.

71
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
Your four digit Uconnect® Security PIN is required to confirm the request.
• You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS)
message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect
(moparownerconnect.com) and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect®
Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock the door
on your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a
request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect® Access App from a compatible smartphone.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect® Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect® Access App is downloaded, login using your
user name and password. You will need your four digit Uconnect® Security PIN to
confirm the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your Uconnect® Access App to
lock the doors, and press the “open Lock” icon to unlock the driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS)
message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect
(moparownerconnect.com) and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect® Notifica-
tions.
Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason. You can send a request to your vehicle in one
of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect® Access App from a compatible smartphone.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect® Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect® Access App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit Uconnect® Security PIN to confirm the
request. You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS)
message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect
(moparownerconnect.com) and click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect® Notifica-
tions.

72
 ELECTRONICS
Voice Texting — Want to dictate a personal message? Register with Uconnect®
Access to take advantage of a new, cloudbased Voice Texting service, an enhance-
ment to Voice Text Reply.
Voice Texting allows you to compose a new text or reply to an incoming text message.
Before you attempt to use the Voice Texting feature, check to ensure you have the
following:
1. A paired, Bluetooth® enabled phone with the Message Access Profile (MAP). Not
all Bluetooth® enabled phones support MAP, including all iPhones® (Apple iOS).
Visit UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility information.
2. An active Uconnect® Access trial or paid subscription. Press the “Apps” button
on the lower right hand corner of the touchscreen to begin the registration
process.
3. Accept the “Allow MAP” profile request on your smart phone. (Please refer to
device manufacturer instructions for details).
To Send A Text Message:
1. Push the Uconnect® Phone Button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the beep.
3. Say “Text.”
4. Uconnect® will prompt you “Say the phone number, or full name and phone type
of the contact you want to send a message to.”
5. Wait for the beep and say a contact that is in your phonebook, or a mobile phone
number that you would like to send the message to.
6. Uconnect® will prompt you “Please say the message that you would like to send.”
(If you do not hear this prompt, you may not have an active subscription with
Uconnect® Access).
7. Wait for the beep, and then dictate any message up to 140 characters. If you
exceed 140 characters, you will hear the following prompt: “Message was too
long; your message will be truncated.”
8. Uconnect® will then repeat the message back to you.
9. Uconnect® will prompt you: “To add to your message, say “Continue”; To delete
the current message and start over, say “Start Over”; to send the current message,
say “Send”; to hear the message again, say “Repeat”.
10. If you are happy with your message and would like to send it, wait for the beep
and say “Send”.
11. Uconnect® will then say “Sending your message.”

73
ELECTRONICS
Sample Commands For Voice Text Reply And Voice Texting
Example Command Action
Send a message to specific contact in
“Text John Smith”
address book
Send 123 - 456 - 7890 a message from
“Text 123 - 456 - 7890”
your phonebook
See recent text messages listed by
“Show messages”
number on Uconnect® screen
“Listen to/view (message number four, Hear messages or read it on Uconnect®
for example)” screen
Send a voice text reply to a current
“Reply”
message
Forward current text to specific contact in
“Forward text/message to “John Smith”
address book
“Forward text/message to Forward current text to specific phone
“123 - 456 - 7890” number

Uconnect® Access Via Mobile — If Equipped (Available On

Uconnect® 8.4AN)
Via Mobile uses the Uconnect® Access App and your smartphone's data plan to
access your personal Pandora®, iHeartRadio, Aha™ by HARMAN and Slacker Radio
accounts from the vehicle and control them using the vehicle touchscreen. Custom-
er’s data plan charges will apply.
To get started using Via Mobile Apps, first register your Uconnect® Access system
where you'll be guided through the setup of your Via Mobile (requires a compatible
Android or iPhone® smartphone). Please refer to “Uconnect® Access Registration”
for more information.
The Uconnect® Access App is compatible with select iPhone® and Android smart-
phones. Visit UconnectPhone.com to confirm that your smartphone is compatible
with Uconnect®. Once you’ve confirmed your smartphone is compatible, pair it to the
vehicle touchscreen via Bluetooth® to use Via Mobile apps. If using an iPhone®, a
USB cable is also supported for the data connection.

74
 ELECTRONICS
Launch the Uconnect® Access App on your smartphone, and login with your
username and password that was set up during registration, (this is your
moparownerconnect.com login). Accept the Terms and Conditions.
• Ensure that Via Mobile data has been
turned on under “Settings” in the
Uconnect® Access App.
• A green indicator next to the words Via
Mobile will show when it is ready to
provide data to the radio (a blue indi-
cator when data is being sent). A red
indicator means that it is not ready to
provide data.
• On android phones, an orange/yellow
indicator signals the phone is con-
nected to the appropriate servers, how-
ever Bluetooth® is turned off on the
mobile phone.

Via Mobile Data Enabled

75
ELECTRONICS
Each time you want to use a Via Mobile app in your vehicle, the Uconnect® Access
App must be running on your smartphone and the smartphone must be paired via
Bluetooth®.

Data Being Sent

76
 ELECTRONICS
If equipped, the Via Mobile apps can be found by selecting the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen in the lower right corner of the radio touchscreen. Via Mobile apps are
listed under the “All Apps” or “Favorite Apps” tab. The words “Via Mobile” will
appear after the app name indicating it is a Via Mobile app.

Favorite Apps

1 — Favorite Tab 2 — Apps Button

77
ELECTRONICS
Via Mobile apps can also be launched through Voice Recognition by pressing the VR
button on the steering wheel and stating “launch” and then the name of the app. For
example, you can say “launch Aha Via Mobile.”
NOTE:
For detailed information on how to use Via Mobile apps visit the Mopar Owner
Connect website (moparownerconnect.com) and login using the username and
password you set up when registering for Uconnect® Access.
A message will be displayed to remind you that Via Mobile apps utilize the data plan
on your connected smartphone to provide content. Many smartphones have a limit to
how much data they can utilize before incurring additional charges. The amount of
data being used varies by smartphone device, cellular service provider and specific
app. Check your mobile phone service plan for more details.* Press “OK” to continue
or the “X” to exit.
(*Additional smartphone data usage charges may apply.)

Via Mobile Apps — If Equipped

• Aha™ by HARMAN — Aha™ by HARMAN makes it easy to instantly access your
favorite Web content on the go. Choose from over 40,000+ stations spanning
internet radio, personalized music, news, entertainment, hotels, weather, audio-
books, Facebook®, Twitter®, and more.
• iHeartRadio — iHeartRadio provides instant access to more than 1,500 live radio
stations from across the country and allows listeners to create custom music
stations inspired by their favorite artists or songs.
• Pandora® — Pandora® gives people the music and comedy they love anytime,
anywhere. Personalized stations launch instantly, with the input of a favorite artist,
track, comedian, or genre.
• Slacker Radio — Enjoy millions of songs and hundreds of handcrafted stations.

NOTE:
For detailed information on how to use Via Mobile apps visit the Mopar Owner
Connect website (moparownerconnect.com) and log in using the username and
password you set up when registering for Uconnect® Access.

78
 ELECTRONICS

Uconnect® 3.0

Uconnect® 3.0 Radio

1 — RADIO Button 8 — SEEK Up Button
2 — INFO Button 9 — ON/OFF Button/Volume Knob
3 — MEDIA Button 10 — BROWSE/ENTER Button/
4 — A-B-C Button TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — Preset Buttons 11 — AUDIO Button
6 — SEEK Down Button 12 — MENU Button
7 — Play/Pause — Mute Button 13 — BACK Button

Clock Setting
1. Press the Menu button at the bottom of the radio, and push the Enter/Browse
button for System Settings. Next, select the Time and Format setting and then
select Set Time by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
2. Adjust the hours or minutes by turning the Tune/Scroll knob, then pressing the
Enter/Browse button to move to the next entry. You can also select 12hr or 24hr
format by turning the Tune/Scroll knob, then pressing the Enter/Browse button on
the desired selection.
3. Once the time is set press the “Back” button to exit the time screen.

79
ELECTRONICS

Audio
• Push the AUDIO button on the radio faceplate.
• The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio
settings.
Treble, Mid, Bass, Fade, Balance, Speed Adjusted Volume, Loudness and Auto Volume
Offset
• Select the desired setting to adjust, then push the ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn
the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting + or - 9. Push the “Back” button
when done.

Radio Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Push to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets
• The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pushing any of
the six Preset buttons.
• When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit into memory, push and
hold the desired numbered button for more than two seconds, or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
• The Radio stores up to 18 presets in each of the Radio modes. Push the A-B-C
button on the faceplate to select the A, B or C preset list.

Disc Operation (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may have a remote CD player located in the lower center console storage
bin, or in the lower center bench seat bin.
• CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a CD/Disc or by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the side of the display. Once in Media Mode, select “Disc.”
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on the
illustration located on the Disc player.
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Push to seek through CD tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.

80
 ELECTRONICS

USB/Audio Jack (AUX) Operation

USB/iPod®
• USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod® cable
into the USB port or by pressing the MEDIA button located left of the display. Once
in Media Mode, select “USB/iPod” for the source.
• Press the MEDIA button, then select “USB/iPod” to change the mode to the USB
device if the device is connected, allowing the music from your portable device to
play through the vehicle's speakers.
Audio Jack (AUX)
The AUX allows a portable device such as an MP3 player or an iPod® to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle’s speakers.
• If the audio cable is connected to the AUX jack and portable device, press the
MEDIA button, then press the “Source” button on the touchscreen and select
“AUX” to change the mode to auxiliary device. This allows the music from your
portable device to play through the vehicle's speakers.
The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons, not the
buttons on the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or portable
device.
Uconnect® 3.0 Available Media Hubs
Uconnect® Media Hub Media Hub Remote USB Remote USB Dual
3.0 (USB, AUX (SD, USB, Port (Fully Port (Charg- Charging
Ports) AUX Ports) Functional) ing Only) Ports
S - - O O

S = Standard Equipment
O = Optional Equipment

81
ELECTRONICS

Uconnect® 5.0

Uconnect® 5.0
1 — Radio Mode 7 — Rotate Volume Control
2 — Compass Information 8 — Rotate Tune/Scroll Knob
3 — Media Mode 9 — Mute Button
4 — Access Settings 10 — Browse/Enter Button
5 — Uconnect® Phone 11 — Screen OFF
6 — More Functions 12 — Back Function

CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.

82
 ELECTRONICS

Clock Setting
To start the clock setting procedure, perform the following:
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate on the right side of the display, then
press the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Set Time & Format” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust the hours or minutes, next select the
“AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen. You can also select 12hr or 24hr
format by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the time is set press the “Done” button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.

Equalizer, Balance And Fade

1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate on the right side of the unit.
2. Then scroll down and press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to get to the
Audio menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio
settings.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble. Use the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to your
desired settings. Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the “arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level
from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center “C” button
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Press the
“Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Speed Adjustable
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to select between
OFF, 1, 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume relative to a decrease in vehicle
speed. Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.
Loudness
• Press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature.
When this feature is activated it improves sound quality at lower volumes.

83
ELECTRONICS

Radio Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets
• When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit into memory, press and
hold the desired preset button on the touchscreen for more that two seconds or
until you hear a confirmation beep.
• The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes. 4 presets are visible
at the top of the radio screen. Pressing the “all” button on the touchscreen on the
radio home screen will display all of the preset stations for that mode.

SiriusXM Premier Over 160 channels

Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one
place. Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all
the premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio®,
every MLB® and NHL® game, every NASCAR® race, Martha Stewart and more. And
get 20+ extra channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commer-
cial free music, news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language
programming.
To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “RADIO” button on the faceplate and
then the SXM button on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial
included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com for U.S. residents and www.siriusxm.ca for
Canadian residents. All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service
is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our
Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI.
© 2014 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

84
 ELECTRONICS

Disc Operation (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may have a remote CD player located in the lower center console storage
bin, or in the lower center bench seat bin.
• CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a CD/Disc or by pressing the MEDIA
button located on the side of the display. Once in Media Mode, select “Disc.”
• Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on
the illustration located on the Disc player.
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through Disc tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
Browse
• Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a
desired track on the Disc. Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen if you want
to cancel the browse function.

USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/Bluetooth® Operation

USB/iPod®
• USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod® cable
into the USB port or by pressing the MEDIA button on the faceplate located left of
the display. Once in Media Mode, press the “source” button on the touchscreen
and select “USB/iPod.”
• Press the MEDIA button on the faceplate, then press the “source” button on the
touchscreen and then select “USB/iPod” to change the mode to the USB device if
the device is connected, allowing the music from your portable device to play
through the vehicle's speakers.
Audio Jack (AUX)
The AUX allows a portable device, such as an MP3 player or an iPod®, to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
• Press the MEDIA button on the faceplate, then press the “source” button on the
touchscreen and then select “AUX” to change the mode to auxiliary device if the
audio jack is connected, allowing the music from your portable device to play
through the vehicle's speakers.
The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons, not the
buttons on the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or portable
device.

85
ELECTRONICS
Bluetooth®
If using a Bluetooth® - equipped device, you may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system.
• Press the MEDIA button on the faceplate, then press the “source” button on the
touchscreen. Select “Bluetooth” to change the mode to Bluetooth® if the device
is paired, allowing the music from your portable device to play through the
vehicle's speakers.
Uconnect® 5.0 Available Media Hubs
Uconnect® Media Hub Media Hub Remote USB Remote USB Dual
5.0 (USB, AUX (SD, USB, Port (Fully Port (Charg- Charging
Ports) AUX Ports) Functional) ing Only) Ports
S - - S O

S = Standard Equipment
O = Optional Equipment

Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With iPhone®)

Once your Uconnect® system is paired with a compatible mobile device, the system
can announce a new incoming text message, and read it to your over the vehicle audio
system. You can reply to the message using Voice Recognition, by selecting, or saying
one of the 18 pre-defined messages.
• Here’s How: Press the Uconnect® Phone button and wait for the beep, then
say “reply.” Uconnect® will give the following prompt: “Please say the message
you would like to send.” Wait for the beep and say one of the pre-defined
messages. (If you are not sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect® will then read the
pre-defined messages allowed. As soon as you hear the message you would like to
send, you can interrupt the list of prompts by pressing the Uconnect® phone
button and saying the phrase. Uconnect® will confirm the message by reading it
back to you. Then press the Phone button and say “Send.”

86
 ELECTRONICS

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <number>
Call me. Are you there yet? minutes late.
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number> of
I’m on my way. minutes.
Can’t talk right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.

Voice texting reply and voice texting features require a compatible mobile device
enabled with Bluetooth® Message Access Profile (MAP). iPhone® and some other
smartphones do not currently support Bluetooth® MAP. U.S. residents can visit
UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility. Canadian residents can
visit UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility.
Want to dictate a personal message? You must first register with Uconnect® Access
to take advantage of a new, cloud-based Voice Texting service, an enhancement to
Voice Text Reply.

WARNING!
• Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions
following applicable laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be
focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing you and others to be severely injured or killed.
• In an emergency, to use Uconnect® Phone, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to Uconnect® Phone,
• and have network coverage.

87
ELECTRONICS

Uconnect® 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides
the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
system.
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display

Uconnect® 5.0

88
 ELECTRONICS
Get Started
1. U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature
compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The
microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first press either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pressing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with your voice are the buttons on your
steering wheel.

Uconnect® VR/Phone Buttons

1 — Push To Begin Radio or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, Or End A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text

89
ELECTRONICS
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your
Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the touchscreen.

Uconnect® 5.0 Visual Cues

90
 ELECTRONICS
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio® stations
you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio trial
required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.

Uconnect® 5.0 Radio

91
ELECTRONICS
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (If
Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod® devices.
(Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your
iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song and genre information is displayed.

Uconnect® 5.0 Media

92
 ELECTRONICS
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the
Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature
compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,”
then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect® 5.0 Phone

93
ELECTRONICS
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and
say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After
the beep, say: Reply
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com for U.S. residents. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports
reading incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <number>
Call me. Are you there yet? minutes late.
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number> of
I’m on my way. minutes.
Can’t talk right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.

Additional Information
© 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and
Uconnect are registered trademarks of Chrysler Group LLC. Android is a trademark of
Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of
Yelp.
Uconnect® System Support:
• U.S residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect®
Security PIN ready when you call.

94
 ELECTRONICS

Uconnect® 8.4A
Uconnect® 8.4A AT A GLANCE

Uconnect® 8.4A Radio Screen

1 — Status Bar 5 — Climate Button
2 — Menu Bar 6 — Controls Button
3 — Uconnect® Apps Button 7 — Media Button
4 — Uconnect® Phone Button 8 — Radio Button

Displaying The Time

• If the time is not currently displayed on the radio or player main page, press the
“settings” button on the touchscreen or the “Apps” button on the touchscreen and
then the “settings” button on the touchscreen. In the Settings list, press the
“Clock” button on the touchscreen then press the check box next to Show Time in
Status Bar.

95
ELECTRONICS
Setting The Time
• Turn the unit on, then press the time display at the top of the screen. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, press the “Controls” button on
the touchscreen, or the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, and then the “settings”
button on the touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the “Clock” button on the
touchscreen, then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck the Sync with GPS box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the Clock Setting screen.
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance the audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or by pressing and dragging over
the level bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus 9, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to activate the
Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
pressing the volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the
audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.

96
 ELECTRONICS

RADIO

Uconnect® 8.4A Radio Screen

1 — Radio Station Presets 5 — Seek Down

2 — Toggle Between Presets 6 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
3 — Choose Radio Band 7 — Seek Up
4 — Browse And Manage Presets 8 — Audio Settings

To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen at the lower
left of the screen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
to bypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable
station once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the “Tune” button on the touchscreen
on the screen, and entering the desired station number.
97
ELECTRONICS
Store Radio Presets
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM).
They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset stations per band,
press the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle
between the two sets of six presets.
• To set a station into memory press and hold the desired numbered button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.

SiriusXM PREMIER OVER 160 CHANNELS

Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one
place. Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all
the premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio®,
every MLB® and NHL® game, every NASCAR® race, Martha Stewart and more. And
get 20+ extra channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commer-
cial free music, news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language
programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “SXM” button on the touchscreen on
the main Radio screen.
The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode:
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through channels in SXM mode.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
to bypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable
channel once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing the “Tune” button on the touchscreen
on the screen, and entering the desired station number.
Jump
• Automatically tells you when Traffic & Weather for a favorite city is available, and
gives you the option to switch to that channel. Press “Jump” to activate the
feature. After listening to Traffic and Weather, press “Jump” again to return to the
previous channel.
Fav
• Activates the favorites menu. You can add up to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just
press “Add Fav Artist” or “Add Fav Song” while the song is playing. You will then
be alerted any time one of these songs, or works by these artists, is playing on other
SiriusXM channels.

98
 ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• You can skip or hide certain channels from view if you do not want access to them.
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen, next press the “Sirius Setup” button on the touchscreen, then select
Channel Skip. Press the box check-mark next to the channel you want skipped.
They will not show up in normal usage.
• SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call
(1-888-601-6297 for U.S. customers, 1-877-438-9677 for Canadian custom-
ers) and request the Family-Friendly Package.
Browse
Lets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone,
Weather and Jump settings also provide a way to browse the SiriusXM channel list.
Browse Sub-Menu Description
Sub-Menu
All Shows the channel listing.
Genre Provides a list of all genres, and lets you jump to a channel within the
selected genre.
Presets Lets you scroll the list of Preset satellite channels. Press the channel, or
press Enter on the Tune knob, to go to that channel. Press the trash can
icon to delete a preset. Your presets are also shown at the top of the main
Satellite Radio screen.
Favorites Lets you manage artists and songs in the Favorites list and configure Alert
Settings to let you know when favorite songs or artists are playing on other
channels. Also, view a list of channels airing any of your Favorites.
Game Zone Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting a game which
is being aired on other SiriusXM channels, or when their game score is
announced. You can select and manage your Teams list here, and
configure alerts.
Jump Lets you select your favorite cities for Traffic & Weather information,
which is used by the Jump feature on the main satellite radio screen.

Replay
Lets you replay up to 44 minutes of the content of the current SiriusXM channel.
Replay Option Description
Option
Play/Pause Press to Pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again to resume
playback.
Rewind/RW Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to
rewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point.
Fast Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast
Forward/FW Forward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound.

99
ELECTRONICS

Replay Option Description

Option
Replay Time Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which
your content lags the Live channel.
Live Resumes playback of Live content at any time while replaying rewound
content.

• SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial
included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US residents) or siriusxm.ca (Canadian
residents). All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is
available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C.
Our Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our
Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK
and HI. ©2014 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

Disc Operation (If Equipped)

• Your vehicle may have a remote CD player located in the lower center console
storage bin, or in the lower center bench seat bin.
• CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a CD/Disc or by pressing the MEDIA
button located on the side of the display. Once in Media Mode, select “Disc.”
• Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on
the illustration located on the Disc player.
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through Disc tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
Browse
• Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a
desired track on the Disc. Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen if you wish
to cancel the browse function.

100
 ELECTRONICS

MEDIA HUB — PLAYING iPod®/USB/MP3 DEVICES

There are many ways to play music from iPod®/MP3 players or USB devices through
your vehicle's sound system. Press your “Media” button on the touchscreen to begin.

Uconnect® 8.4A Media Hub

1 — USB Charge Only Port 3 — USB Port
2 — SD Card Port 4 — Audio/AUX Jack

Audio Jack (AUX)

The AUX allows a portable device, such as an MP3 player or an iPod®, to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the “AUX” button on the touchscreen will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the audio jack is connected, allowing the music from your portable device
to be heard through the vehicle's speakers. In order to activate the AUX, plug in the
audio jack.
The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons. The
volume may be controlled using the radio or portable device.
To route the audio cable out of the center console, use the access cut out in the front
of the console.

101
ELECTRONICS
USB Port
Connect your iPod® or compatible device using a USB cable into the USB Port. USB
Memory sticks with audio files can also be used. Audio from the device can be played
on the vehicles sound system while providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
When connected, the iPod®/compatible USB device can be controlled using the
radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next or previous track,
browse, and list the contents.
The iPod® battery charges when plugged into the USB port (if supported by the
specific device).
To route the USB/iPod® cable out of the center console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your iPod® device for the first time, the system may take several
minutes to read your music, depending on the number of files. For example, the
system will take approximately five minutes for every 1000 songs loaded on the
device. Also during the reading process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will be
disabled. This process is needed to ensure the full use of your iPod® features and
only happens the first time it is connected. After the first time, the reading process
of your iPod® will take considerably less time unless changes are made or new songs
are added to the playlist.
The USB port supports certain Mini, Classic, Nano, Touch, and iPhone® devices. The
USB port also supports playing music from compatible external USB Mass Storage
Class memory devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the USB
port features. Please visit Apple’s website for iPod® software updates.
SD Card
Play songs stored on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot.
Song playback can be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to
play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and list the contents.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio
If equipped with Uconnect® Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped iPod®
devices, cell phones or other media players, may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system. Your connected device must be Bluetooth-compatible, and
paired with your system (see Uconnect® Phone for pairing instructions). You can
access the music from your connected Bluetooth® device by pressing the Bluetooth®
button on the touchscreen while in Media mode.

102
 ELECTRONICS
Uconnect® 8.4A & 8.4AN Available Media Hubs
Uconnect® Media Hub Media Hub Remote USB Remote USB Dual
8.4A & (USB, AUX (SD, USB, Port (Fully Port (Charg- Charging
8.4AN Ports) AUX Ports) Functional) ing Only) Ports
- S S O O

S = Standard Equipment
O = Optional Equipment
iPod®/CD/AUX CONTROLS

iPod®/CD/AUX Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track 5 — Music Track Information
2 — Music Track And Time 6 — Show Songs Currently In Cue To
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks Be Played
4 — Music Source 7 — Browse Music By

The iPod®/CD/AUX controls are accessed by pressing the desired button on the
touchscreen displayed on the side of the screen and choosing between Disc, AUX,
iPod®, Bluetooth or SD Card.
NOTE:
Uconnect® will usually automatically switch to the appropriate mode when some-
thing is first connected or inserted into the system.

103
ELECTRONICS

NAVIGATION (DEALER-ACTIVATED OPTION)

• Your Uconnect® 8.4A is “Navigation-Ready,” and can be equipped with Naviga-
tion at an extra cost. Please see your dealer for details.
• The information in the section below is only applicable if the Navigation has been
activated.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” Nav
Volume Adjustment button on the touchscreens.

Uconnect® 8.4 Navigation

1 — Find A Destination 5 — Navigation Settings
2 — View Map 6 — Stop A Route
3 — Information 7 — Detour A Route
4 — Emergency 8 — Repeat Route Guidance Prompt

104
 ELECTRONICS
Finding Points Of Interest (POI)
• From the main Navigation menu, press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen.
• Select a Category and then a subcategory, if necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the “Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen and then press the “Spell
Name” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
Entering A Destination Address
• From the main Navigation menu press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Address” button on the touchscreen.
• Follow the on-screen prompts (country, state/province, city, street) to enter the
address and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
• Destination entry is not available while your vehicle is in motion. However, you can
also use Voice Command to enter an address while moving. See Voice Command
Tips for more information.
Setting Your Home Location
• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the
Navigation system and the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen.
• You may enter your address directly, use your current location as your home
address, or choose from recently found locations.
• To delete your Home location (or other saved locations) so you can save a new Home
location, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen from the Main Navigation
menu, then press the “Go Home” button on the touchscreen, and in the Yes screen
press the “Options” button on the touchscreen. In the Options menu press “Clear
Home.” Set a new Home location by following the previous instructions.

105
ELECTRONICS
Go Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu,
press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen.

Uconnect® 8.4 Map

1 — Distance To Next Turn 5 — Your Location On The Map
2 — Next Turn Street 6 — Navigation Main Menu
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival 7 — Current Street Location
4 — Zoom In And Out 8 — Navigation Routing Options

Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you travel on major
roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.

106
 ELECTRONICS
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only reasonable option, the device might
not calculate a detour.
• For more information, see your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

Uconnect® Phone (Bluetooth® HANDS FREE CALLING)

• If the Uconnect® Phone Button exists on your steering wheel, then you have
the Uconnect® Phone features.
• The Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communica-
tions system with Voice Command Capability (see Voice Command section).
• The Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone
using simple voice commands or pressing the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Refer to the Understand The Features Of Your Vehicle section of your vehicle's
Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
NOTE:
The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S.
residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400. Canadian Residents –
visit UconnectPhone.com or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French).

Pairing A Phone
• To use the Uconnect® Phone feature, you must first pair your Bluetooth® phone
with the Uconnect® system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
• Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen and then the “settings” button on
the touchscreen. Next, press “Add Device.”
• Uconnect® Phone will display an “In progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Start Pairing Procedure On Mobile Phone
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. This is
usually within Settings or Options under “Bluetooth.” See your mobile phone’s
manual for details.
• When your phone finds the system, select “Uconnect” as the paired device. You
may be prompted by your phone to download the phonebook. This is so you can
make calls by saying the name of your contact (PBAP-Phone Book Access Profile).

107
ELECTRONICS
Complete The Pairing Procedure
• When prompted on the phone, verify with the radio password shown on the
Uconnect® Screen.
• If your phone asks you to accept a connection request from Uconnect®, select
“Yes.” If available, check the box telling it not to ask again – that way your phone
will automatically connect each time you start the vehicle.
Select The Mobile Phone's Priority Level
• When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you
to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired
phones within range. Only one phone can be paired at a time.
• You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press the Uconnect® Phone button on
your steering wheel to begin.

Making A Phone Call

To begin a phone call using Uconnect® Voice Command:
• Push the Uconnect® Phone button .
• After the BEEP, say “dial” then the number (or “call” then the name as listed in
your phone; see Phonebook).
NOTE:
You can also initiate a call by using the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.

Receiving A Call — Accept (And End)

• When an incoming call rings/is announced on Uconnect®, push the Phone
button .
• To end a call, push the Phone button .

Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call

• During a call, press the “mute” button on the touchscreen to mute and unmute
the call.

Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle

During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the touchscreen to transfer an
on-going call between handset and vehicle.

108
 ELECTRONICS

Common Phone Commands (Examples)

• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Call Emergency”
• “Call Towing Assistance”
• “Redial”

Phonebook
• Uconnect® radios will automatically download your phonebook from your paired
phone, if this feature is supported by your phone. Entries are updated each time
that the phone is connected. If your phone book entries do not appear, check the
settings on your phone. Some phones require you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on your radio screen, but editing can only be done
on your phone. To browse, press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, then the
“Phonebook” button on the touchscreen.
• Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favorites for quicker access. Favorites
are shown at the top of your main phone screen.

Changing The Volume

• Start a dialogue by pressing the Phone button , then say a command for
example - "Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable
level while the Uconnect® system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Uconnect® is different than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, press the Uconnect® Phone button on the steering wheel and
say "help." Touch the display or push either or button and say "cancel"
to cancel the help session.

109
ELECTRONICS

Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With iPhone®)

Once your Uconnect® system is paired with a compatible mobile device, the system
can announce a new incoming text message, and read it to your over the vehicle audio
system. You can reply to the message using Voice Recognition, by selecting, or saying
one of the 18 pre-defined messages.
• Here’s How: Press the Uconnect® Phone button and wait for the beep, then
say “reply.” Uconnect® will give the following prompt: “Please say the message
you would like to send.” Wait for the beep and say one of the pre-defined
messages. (If you are not sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect® will then read the
pre-defined messages allowed. As soon as you hear the message you would like to
send, you can interrupt the list of prompts by pressing the Uconnect® phone
button and saying the phrase. Uconnect® will confirm the message by reading it
back to you. Then press the Phone button and say “Send.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <number>
Call me. Are you there yet? minutes late.
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number> of
I’m on my way. minutes.
Can’t talk right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.

Voice texting reply and voice texting features require a compatible mobile device
enabled with Bluetooth® Message Access Profile (MAP). iPhone® and some other
smartphones do not currently support Bluetooth® MAP. U.S. residents can visit
UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility. Canadian residents can
visit UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility.
Want to dictate a personal message? You must first register with Uconnect® Access
to take advantage of a new, cloud-based Voice Texting service, an enhancement to
Voice Text Reply.

WARNING!
• Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions
following applicable laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be
focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing you and others to be severely injured or killed.
• In an emergency, to use Uconnect® Phone, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to Uconnect® Phone,
• and have network coverage.

110
 ELECTRONICS

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides
the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system.
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect® 8.4AN system.
If not, you have a Uconnect® 8.4A system.

Uconnect® 8.4AN

111
ELECTRONICS
Get Started
1. U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature
compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The
microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with your voice are the buttons on your
steering wheel.

Uconnect® VR/Phone Buttons

1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text

112
 ELECTRONICS
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your
Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the touchscreen.

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN

113
ELECTRONICS
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio® stations
you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio trial
required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio

114
 ELECTRONICS
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (If
Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod® devices.
(Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your
iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song and genre information is displayed.

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media

115
ELECTRONICS
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the
Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
U.S. residents can visit:
• UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Canadian residents can visit:
• UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,”
then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone

116
 ELECTRONICS
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and
say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After
the beep, say: Reply
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com for U.S. residents. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports
reading incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <number>
Call me. Are you there yet? minutes late.
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number> of
I’m on my way. minutes.
Can’t talk right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.

117
ELECTRONICS
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone
comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
• Set both temperatures to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering
wheel (if equipped).

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Climate

118
 ELECTRONICS
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive
when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: Enter state.
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After the beep, say “Find
nearest coffee shop.”

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation

119
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect® Access — If Equipped (8.4A/8.4AN)
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect®
Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
press the “Apps” button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed
registration instructions can be found on the next page.
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the
continental United States, Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
CALL
9 11
9-1-1 Call Theft Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start** Yelp® Search

Text

Remote Horn and Lights Voice Texting

Roadside Assistance Call Wi-Fi Hotspot***

**If vehicle is equipped.

***Extra charges apply.

120
 ELECTRONICS
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the “Apps” button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press “Register” or go to the “Favorite Apps” or “All
Apps” menu and press “Uconnect® Registration.”
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and confirm your personal email
address. Then press “Send.”
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from Uconnect® Access.
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and complete the easy online
registration process to create a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.

Uconnect® 8.4AN Registration

121
ELECTRONICS
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Uconnect® Access App.
Once you have downloaded the App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from
virtually any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with factory-installed
Remote Start.)
Download the Uconnect® Access App to compatible Apple® or Android® mobile
devices. All you need to do is:
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to your Mopar® Owner Connect
account at moparownerconnect.com.
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone number to receive a link to
download the App on your mobile device. Or, go to iTunes® or Google Play and
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect user name and password
and log in. Your vehicle is then connected to your mobile device.

Mobile App

Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)

You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have a compatible MAP –
enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message. (Not
compatible with iPhone®.)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the beep, say: “Send
message to John Smith.”

122
 ELECTRONICS
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send.
Wait for Uconnect® to process your message.
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options
to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with your message, after the
beep, say “Send.”
TIP:
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use your voice to search for the
most popular places or things around you.
1. Push the VR button . After the beep, say: Launch YELP®
2. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touchscreen, push the VR
button , then say: YELP® search
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect® the place or
business that you’d like Uconnect® to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the
Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.

Yelp®

123
ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN — US Market Only)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 -
day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN system. (Not available for 8.4A
system.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.

SiriusXM Travel Link™

124
 ELECTRONICS
Additional Information
© 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and
Uconnect are registered trademarks of Chrysler Group LLC. Android is a trademark of
Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect® System Support:
• U.S residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect®
Security PIN ready when you call.

125
ELECTRONICS

Uconnect® 8.4AN
Uconnect® 8.4AN AT A GLANCE

Uconnect® 8.4AN Radio Screen

1 — Status Bar 6 — Uconnect® Navigation Button
2 — View Small Navigation Map 7 — Climate Button
3 — HD Radio Available 8 — Controls Button
4 — Uconnect® Apps Button 9 — Media Button
5 — Uconnect® Phone Button 10 — Radio Button

Displaying The Time

• If the time is not currently displayed on the radio or player main page, press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen or the “Apps” button on the touchscreen
and then the “settings” button on the touchscreen. In the Settings list, press the
“Clock” button on the touchscreen then press the check box next to Sync Time.

126
 ELECTRONICS
Setting The Time
• Model 8.4AN synchronizes time automatically via GPS, so it should not require
any time adjustment. If you do need to set the time manually, follow the
instructions below for Model 8.4A.
• For Model 8.4A, turn the unit on, then press the time display at the top of the
screen. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, press the “Controls” button on
the touchscreen or the “Apps” button on the touchscreen and then the “settings”
button on the touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the “Clock” button on the
touchscreen, then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the Clock Setting screen.
Audio Settings
• Press of the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings
screen to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level
bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus 9, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to activate the
Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
pressing the volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the
audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.

127
ELECTRONICS

RADIO

Uconnect® 8.4AN Radio

1 — Radio Station Presets 6 — Seek Down

2 — Toggle Between Presets 7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
3 — Choose Radio Band 8 — Seek Up
4 — HD Radio Available 9 — Audio Settings
5 — Browse And Manage Presets

• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen at the
lower left of the screen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
to bypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable
station once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.

128
 ELECTRONICS
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the “Tune” button on the screen, and
entering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets
• Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and
SXM). They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset stations
per band, press the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen
to toggle between the two sets of six presets.
• To set a station into memory press and hold the desired numbered button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
HD Radio (US RESIDENTS ONLY)
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 8.4AN) operates similar to conventional radio
except it allows broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is provided with a clear sound that
enhances the listening experience. HD radio can also transmit data such as song
title or artist.

SiriusXM PREMIER OVER 160 CHANNELS

Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one
place. Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all
the premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio®,
every MLB® and NHL® game, every NASCAR® race, Martha Stewart and more. And
get 20+ extra channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commer-
cial free music, news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language
programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “SXM” button on the touchscreen on
the main Radio screen.
The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode:
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through channels in SXM mode.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
to bypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable
channel once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing the “Tune” button on the touchscreen
on the screen, and entering the desired station number.

129
ELECTRONICS
Jump
• Automatically tells you when Traffic & Weather for a favorite city is available, and
gives you the option to switch to that channel. Press “Jump” to activate the
feature. After listening to Traffic and Weather, press “Jump” again to return to the
previous channel.
Fav
• Activates the favorites menu. You can add up to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just
press “Add Fav Artist” or “Add Fav Song” while the song is playing. You will then
be alerted any time one of these songs, or works by these artists, is playing on other
SiriusXM channels.
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• You can skip or hide certain channels from view if you do not want access to them.
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen, next press the “Sirius Setup” button on the touchscreen, then select
Channel Skip. Press the box check-mark next to the channel you want skipped.
They will not show up in normal usage.
• SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call
(1-888-601-6297 for U.S. customers, 1-877-438-9677 for Canadian custom-
ers) and request the Family-Friendly Package.
Browse
Lets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone,
Weather and Jump settings also provide a way to browse the SiriusXM channel list.
Browse Sub-Menu Description
Sub-Menu
All Shows the channel listing.
Genre Provides a list of all genres, and lets you jump to a channel within the
selected genre.
Presets Lets you scroll the list of Preset satellite channels. Press the channel, or
press Enter on the Tune knob, to go to that channel. Press the trash can
icon to delete a preset. Your presets are also shown at the top of the main
Satellite Radio screen.
Favorites Lets you manage artists and songs in the Favorites list and configure Alert
Settings to let you know when favorite songs or artists are playing on other
channels. Also, view a list of channels airing any of your Favorites.
Game Zone Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting a game which
is being aired on other SiriusXM channels, or when their game score is
announced. You can select and manage your Teams list here, and
configure alerts.
Jump Lets you select your favorite cities for Traffic & Weather information,
which is used by the Jump feature on the main satellite radio screen.

130
 ELECTRONICS
Replay
Lets you replay up to 44 minutes of the content of the current SiriusXM channel.
Replay Option Description
Option
Play/Pause Press to Pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again to resume
playback.
Rewind/RW Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to
rewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point.
Fast Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast
Forward/FW Forward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound.
Replay Time Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which
your content lags the Live channel.
Live Resumes playback of Live content at any time while replaying rewound
content.

• SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial
included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US residents) or siriusxm.ca (Canadian
residents). All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is
available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C.
Our Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our
Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK
and HI. ©2014 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

Disc Operation (If Equipped)

• Your vehicle may have a remote CD player located in the lower center console
storage bin, or in the lower center bench seat bin.
• CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a CD/Disc or by pressing the MEDIA
button located on the side of the display. Once in Media Mode, select “Disc.”
• Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on
the illustration located on the Disc player.
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through Disc tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
Browse
• Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a
desired track on the Disc. Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen if you wish
to cancel the browse function.
131
ELECTRONICS

MEDIA HUB — PLAYING iPod®/USB/MP3 DEVICES

Uconnect® 8.4AN Media Hub

1 — USB Charge Only Port 3 — USB Port

2 — SD Card Port 4 — Audio/AUX Jack

There are many ways to play music from iPod®/MP3 players or USB devices through
your vehicle's sound system. Press your Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a portable device, such as an MP3 player or an iPod®, to be
plugged into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound system, using a 3.5 mm
audio cable, to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touchscreen will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the audio jack is connected, allowing the music from your portable device
to be heard through the vehicle's speakers. To activate the AUX, plug in the audio
jack.
• The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons. The
volume may be controlled using the radio or portable device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center console, use the access cut out in the
front of the console.

132
 ELECTRONICS
USB Port
• Connect your iPod® or compatible device using a USB cable into the USB Port.
USB Memory sticks with audio files can also be used. Audio from the device can
be played on the vehicles sound system while providing metadata (artist, track
title, album, etc.) information on the radio display.
• When connected, the iPod®/compatible USB device can be controlled using the
radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next or previous track,
browse, and list the contents.
• The iPod® battery charges when plugged into the USB port (if supported by the
specific device).
• To route the USB/iPod® cable out of the center console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your iPod® device for the first time, the system may take several
minutes to read your music, depending on the number of files. For example, the
system will take approximately five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on the
device. Also during the reading process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will be
disabled. This process is needed to ensure the full use of your iPod® features and
only happens the first time it is connected. After the first time, the reading process
of your iPod® will take considerably less time unless changes are made or new songs
are added to the playlist.
The USB port supports certain Mini, Classic, Nano, Touch, and iPhone® devices. The
USB port also supports playing music from compatible external USB Mass Storage
Class memory devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the USB
port features. Please visit Apple’s website for iPod® software updates.
SD Card
• Play songs stored on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot.
• Song playback can be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls
to play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and list the contents.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio
• If equipped with Uconnect® Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped iPod®
devices, cell phones or other media players, may also be able to stream music to
your vehicle's sound system. Your connected device must be Bluetooth-
compatible and paired with your system (see Uconnect® Phone for pairing
instructions). You can access the music from your connected Bluetooth® device by
pressing the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen while in Media mode.

133
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect® 8.4A & 8.4AN Available Media Hubs
Uconnect® Media Hub Media Hub Remote USB Remote USB Dual
8.4A & (USB, AUX (SD, USB, Port (Fully Port (Charg- Charging
8.4AN Ports) AUX Ports) Functional) ing Only) Ports
- S S O O

S = Standard Equipment
O = Optional Equipment
iPod®/CD/AUX CONTROLS

iPod®/CD/AUX Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track 5 — Music Track Information
2 — Music Track And Time 6 — Show Songs Currently In Cue To
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks Be Played
4 — Music Source 7 — Browse Music By

The iPod®/CD/AUX controls are accessed by pressing the desired button on the
touchscreen and choosing between Disc, AUX, iPod®, Bluetooth® or SD Card.
NOTE:
Uconnect® will automatically switch to the appropriate mode when something is first
connected or inserted into the system.

134
 ELECTRONICS

NAVIGATION
• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the
Navigation system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “View Map” button on the touchscreen from the Nav Main Menu.
2. With the map displayed, press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in the
lower right area of the screen.
3. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
4. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.

Uconnect® 8.4AN Navigation

1 — Find A Destination 5 — Navigation Settings
2 — View Map 6 — Stop A Route
3 — Information 7 — Detour A Route
4 — Emergency 8 — Repeat Route Guidance Prompt

135
ELECTRONICS
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen.
• Select a Category and then a subcategory, if necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the “Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Spell
Name” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without taking your hands off the wheel.
• Just press the Uconnect® Voice Command button on the steering wheel,
wait for the beep and say something like, "800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Destination entry is not available while your vehicle is in motion. However, you can
also use Voice Commands to enter an address while moving. Refer to Common
Navigation Voice Commands in the Uconnect® Voice Command section.
Setting Your Home Location
• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the
Navigation system and the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen.
• You may enter your address directly, use your current location as your home
address, or choose from recently found locations.
• To delete your Home location (or other saved locations) so you can save a new
Home location, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen from the Main
Navigation menu, then press the “Go Home” button on the touchscreen, and in the
Yes screen press the “Options” button on the touchscreen. In the Options menu
press the “Clear Home” button on the touchscreen. Set a new Home location by
following the previous instructions.

136
 ELECTRONICS
Go Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu,
press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen.

Uconnect® 8.4AN Map

1 — Distance To Next Turn 5 — Your Location On The Map
2 — Next Turn Street 6 — Navigation Main Menu
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival 7 — Current Street Location
4 — Zoom In And Out 8 — Navigation Routing Options

Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you travel on major
roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.

137
ELECTRONICS
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only reasonable option, the device may not
calculate a detour. For more information, see your Uconnect® User's Manual.

SiriusXM TRAFFIC (US Market Only)

Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By enhancing your vehicle's navigation system
with the ability to see detailed traffic information, you can pinpoint traffic incidents,
determine average traffic speed and estimate travel time along your route. Since the
service is integrated with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM Traffic can help
drivers pick the fastest route based on traffic conditions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources, including police and emergency ser-
vices, cameras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
• View conditions for points along your route and beyond. Available in over 130
markets.

SiriusXM TRAVEL LINK (US Market Only)

In addition to delivering over 130 channels of the best sports, entertainment, talk,
and commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers premium data services that work in
conjunction with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM Travel Link brings a
wealth of useful information into your vehicle and right to your fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in your area and route to the
station of your choice.
• Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres and listings in your area and route to
the theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check variety of local and national weather information from radar
maps to current and 5-day forecast.
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes
after you start your vehicle, Travel Link information arrives and updates in the
background. You can access the information whenever you like, with no waiting.

138
 ELECTRONICS
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press
the “SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the five (5) year
trial subscription included with your vehicle purchase.
SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in the United States.
Fuel Prices Check local gas and diesel prices in your area and route to the station
of your choice.
Movie Listings Check local movie theatres and listings in your area and route to the
theater of your choice.
Sports Scores In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules.
Weather Check variety of local and national weather information from radar
maps to current and 5-day forecast.

Uconnect® Phone (Bluetooth® HANDS FREE CALLING)

• If the Uconnect® Phone Button exists on your steering wheel, then you have
the Uconnect® Phone features.
• The Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communica-
tions system with Voice Command Capability (see Voice Command section).
• The Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone
using simple voice commands or pressing the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Refer to the Understand The Features Of Your Vehicle section of your vehicle's
Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.
NOTE:
The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S.
residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400. Canadian Residents –
visit UconnectPhone.com or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French).

Pairing A Phone
• To use the Uconnect® Phone feature, you must first pair your Bluetooth® phone
with the Uconnect® system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
• Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen and then the “settings” button on
the touchscreen. Next, press “Add Device.”
• Uconnect® Phone will display an “In progress” screen while the system is
connecting.

139
ELECTRONICS
Start Pairing Procedure On Mobile Phone
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. This is
usually within Settings or Options under “Bluetooth.” See your mobile phone’s
manual for details.
• When your phone finds the system, select “Uconnect” as the paired device. You
may be prompted by your phone to download the phonebook. This is so you can
make calls by saying the name of your contact (PBAP-Phone Book Access Profile).
Complete The Pairing Procedure
• When prompted on the phone, verify with the radio password shown on the
Uconnect® Screen.
• If your phone asks you to accept a connection request from Uconnect®, select
“Yes.” If available, check the box telling it not to ask again – that way your phone
will automatically connect each time you start the vehicle.
Select The Mobile Phone's Priority Level
• When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you
to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired
phones within range. Only one phone can be paired at a time.
• You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press the Uconnect® Phone button on
your steering wheel to begin.

Making A Phone Call

To begin a phone call using Uconnect® Voice Command:
• Push the Uconnect® Phone button .
• After the BEEP, say “dial” then the number (or “call” then the name as listed in
your phone; see Phonebook).
NOTE:
You can also initiate a call by using the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.

Receiving A Call — Accept (And End)

• When an incoming call rings/is announced on Uconnect®, push the Phone
button .
• To end a call, push the Phone button .

Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call

• During a call, press the “mute” button on the touchscreen to mute and unmute
the call.

140
 ELECTRONICS

Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle

During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the touchscreen to transfer an
on-going call between handset and vehicle.

Common Phone Commands (Examples)

• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Call Emergency”
• “Call Towing Assistance”
• “Redial”

Phonebook
• Uconnect® radios will automatically download your phonebook from your paired
phone, if this feature is supported by your phone. Entries are updated each time
that the phone is connected. If your phone book entries do not appear, check the
settings on your phone. Some phones require you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on your radio screen, but editing can only be done
on your phone. To browse, press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, then the
“Phonebook” button on the touchscreen.
• Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favorites for quicker access. Favorites
are shown at the top of your main phone screen.

Changing The Volume

• Start a dialogue by pressing the Phone button , then say a command for
example - "Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable
level while the Uconnect® system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Uconnect® is different than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, press the Uconnect® Phone button on the steering wheel and
say "help." Touch the display or push either or button and say "cancel"
to cancel the help session.

141
ELECTRONICS

Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With iPhone®)

Once your Uconnect® system is paired with a compatible mobile device, the system
can announce a new incoming text message, and read it to your over the vehicle audio
system. You can reply to the message using Voice Recognition, by selecting, or saying
one of the 18 pre-defined messages.
• Here’s How: Press the Uconnect® Phone button and wait for the beep, then
say “reply.” Uconnect® will give the following prompt: “Please say the message
you would like to send.” Wait for the beep and say one of the pre-defined
messages. (If you are not sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect® will then read the
pre-defined messages allowed. As soon as you hear the message you would like to
send, you can interrupt the list of prompts by pressing the Uconnect® phone
button and saying the phrase. Uconnect® will confirm the message by reading it
back to you. Then press the Phone button and say “Send.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <number>
Call me. Are you there yet? minutes late.
I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number> of
I’m on my way. minutes.
Can’t talk right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.

Voice texting reply and voice texting features require a compatible mobile device
enabled with Bluetooth® Message Access Profile (MAP). iPhone® and some other
smartphones do not currently support Bluetooth® MAP. U.S. residents can visit
UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility. Canadian residents can
visit UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility.
Want to dictate a personal message? You must first register with Uconnect® Access
to take advantage of a new, cloud-based Voice Texting service, an enhancement to
Voice Text Reply.

WARNING!
• Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions
following applicable laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be
focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing you and others to be severely injured or killed.
• In an emergency, to use Uconnect® Phone, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to Uconnect® Phone,
• and have network coverage.

142
 ELECTRONICS

VOICE COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

Uconnect® 8.4AN Voice Command Quick Reference
If the Uconnect® Voice Command button exists on your steering wheel, you
have the Voice Command feature, which is optimized for the driver. The Voice
Command feature lets you keep your hands on the wheel and your eyes on the road.
• When you push the Voice Command button located on the steering wheel,
you will hear a beep. After the beep, give your command. If you do not know what
commands to say, you can say “help” and the system will provide options to you.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options, push the Voice
Command button, and after the beep, say your command.
NOTE:
All phone oriented voice commands are accessible by first pushing the Phone Pick
Up button, not the Voice Command button. To end a call simply push the Phone
Hang Up button. In some vehicles, the Phone Pickup button serves the
dual purpose of ending calls as well.
Voice Command (VR) User TIPs
• To hear available commands, push the Uconnect® Voice Command button
and say “Help.” You will hear available commands for the menu displayed.
• At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or “Help.” These commands are
universal and can be used from virtually any menu. All other specific commands
can be used depending upon the active application.
• You can interrupt the system prompts at any time by pushing the Uconnect® Voice
Command button while the system is speaking. After the beep, you can say
a command.
• You can “chain” commands together for faster results. Say “Call Joe Doe mobile,”
for example.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ in (1 cm)
gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few
feet/meters away from you.
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period.
Steering Wheel Buttons
• You can control many of your radio features using your voice. Push either the
Uconnect® Voice Command button, or the Phone Pick Up button on
your steering wheel.

143
ELECTRONICS
Available Radio Button On The Touchscreen Voice Commands

Steering
(3)
Wheel (1) Radio (2) Media (4) Navi- (5) Phone (6)
Climate
Buttons to Mode Mode gation Mode APPS
Controls
Push:
Uconnect®
AM/FM & Destina-
Voice Media Tempera-
Satellite tion
Command Devices ture - Yelp®
Types of Band Selection
(VR) Control Control
Voice Control and View
Button
Com- GENERAL
mands
Call Ini-
Available tiation,
Call Man-
Uconnect ®
agement,
Phone
- - - - Pre- -
Pick Up
defined
Button
Voice
Text
Reply

144
 ELECTRONICS
Voice Command Examples – Uconnect® 8.4AN
While In: Voice Command Example:
GENERAL
“Go to Radio” (Media, Climate,
Navigation, Phone, Apps) – Settings,
and Controls are not Voice Command
accessible
“Cancel”
“Help” (to listen to suggested commands
specific to current need)
Anytime
“Repeat”
“Launch Yelp®” – Required 1st voice
command to launch Yelp® app
“Yelp® Search” – Required 2nd voice
command to activate app functionality
using Steering Wheel Voice Control
Button
RADIO
“Tune to AM950”, “Tune to 95.5FM
AM/FM
(preset 5)
“Tune to Satellite Channel 80's on 8”,
Satellite Band Control
Tune to Satellite Channel 32 (preset 4)
MEDIA
“Browse” (show) “artist” (albums, music)
“Show paired phones” (devices)
Media Devices Control (Functionality is “Play song – Maple Leaf Rag” (artist -
dependent on compatibility between Scott Joplin, genre - rock, album -
devices and radio) Ragtime Favorites)
“Shuffle” – available with iPod, USB and
SD Card
CLIMATE
“Set temperature to 70 degrees” – single
climate zone vehicles
Temperature Control
“Set driver” (passenger) “temperature to
75 degrees” – dual climate zone vehicles
NAVIGATION
“Navigate to” (Destination) 123 Any
Street, Any town, Any State (any full
address)
“Go Home” – destination previously
Destination Selection & View defined by driver
“Repeat guidance” – hear the last
navigation prompt
“Cancel Route”
“View Map”

145
ELECTRONICS

While In: Voice Command Example:

PHONE
“Dial 123-456-7890” (phone number)
Call Initiation (Requires that phone has “Call John Smith mobile” (home, office,
other)
been Bluetooth® paired with radio)
“Redial”
“Show outgoing” (recent) “calls”
“Search for John Smith” (any contact
Call Management name in address book)
“Show (display list) contacts”
Voice Texting (Requires registration with
Uconnect® Access and a current Create a text message using Voice
subscription) Command Capability
NOTE: Requires a compatible mobile “Send a message to John Smith
device enabled with Bluetooth Message (123-456-7890)”
“Show Messages”
Access Profile (MAP). iPhone and some
“Listen to” (view) “number 4”
other smartphones do not currently “Reply”
support Bluetooth® MAP. Visit “Forward text” (message) “to John
Uconnectphone.com for system and Smith” (phone type, number)
device compatibility.
Forward one of 18 pre-defined SMS mes-
sages to incoming calls/text messages:
“Yes.”
“No.”
“Okay.”
Voice Text Reply (Radio audibly recognizes
“I can’t talk right now.”
these 18 pre-defined SMS messages as “Call me.”
you speak) “I’ll call you later.”
NOTE: Requires a compatible mobile “I’m on my way.”
device enabled with Bluetooth Message “Thanks.”
Access Profile (MAP). iPhone and some “I’ll be late.”
other smartphones do not currently “I will be <number> minutes late.”
support Bluetooth® MAP. Visit “See you in <number> minutes”
Uconnectphone.com for system and “Stuck in traffic.”
“Start without me.”
device compatibility.
“Where are you?”
“Are you there yet?”
“I need directions.”
“I’m lost.”
“See you later.”

146
 ELECTRONICS

While In: Voice Command Example:

APPS
“Show Fuel prices”
“Show Current Weather” – provides
SiriusXM Travel Link (Traffic function is access to Forecast as well
“Show Weather map” – multiple map
not voice command accessible within
formats available
SiriusXM Travel Link) “Show Sports”
“Show Movie listings”
“Show My favorites”
“Launch Yelp®” – Required 1st voice
command to launch Yelp® app
“Yelp® Search” – Required 2nd voice
command to activate app functionality
Yelp® (Yelp® adds it's own audible using Steering Wheel Voice Control
prompts, and response time varies de- Button
pending on carrier coverage speed) “Hotel” (restaurant, gas station, mail,
hospital) – for nearest desired general
POI
“Italian restaurants” – for nearest
specified POI category

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The steering wheel audio controls are
located on the rear surface of the steering
wheel.

Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to in-
crease or decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to
change modes AM/FM/CD/SXM.

Left Switch
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
• Push the switch up or down to search
for the next listenable station or select the next or previous CD track.
• Push the button in the center to select the next preset station (radio) or to change
CDs if equipped with a CD Changer.

147
ELECTRONICS

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) OR DRIVER

INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The EVIC/DID features an interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Pushing the controls on the left side of the steering wheel allows the driver to select
vehicle information and Personal Settings. For additional information, refer to
“Programmable Features” in this guide.
• Push and release the UP button
to scroll upward through the main
menus and submenus (Digital Speed-
ometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel Economy
Info, Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Trailer
Tow, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen
Setup, Vehicle Settings).
• Push and release the DOWN but-
ton to scroll downward through the
main menus and submenus.
• Push and release the RIGHT but-
ton for access to main menus, sub-
menus or to select a personal setting in
the setup menu. Push and hold the
RIGHT button for two seconds to EVIC/DID Controls
reset features.
• Push and release the BACK/LEFT button to scroll back to a previous menu or
submenu.

Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass
manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC/DID will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in
an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed
in the EVIC/DID turns off. The compass will now function normally.

148
 ELECTRONICS

PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Programmable Features
The EVIC/DID can be used to view or change the following settings. Push the UP
or DOWN button until System Setup displays, then push RIGHT button.
Scroll through the settings using the UP or DOWN buttons. Push the RIGHT
button to change the setting. Push the BACK/LEFT button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub menu.
• Language Select • Remote Start Comfort System
• Units • Easy Exit Seat
• ParkSense • Key-off Power Delay
• Tilt Mirror in Reverse • Commercial Settings
• Rain Sensing Wipers • Air Suspension Display Alerts
• Hill Start Assist • Aero Ride Height Mode
• Headlights Off Delay • Tire/Jack Mode
• Illuminated Approach • Transport Mode
• Headlights On with Wipers • Wheel Alignment Mode
• Automatic Highbeams • Horn w/ Remote Lower
• Flash Lights with Lock • Lights w/ Remote Lower
• Auto Lock Doors • Trailer Select
• Auto Unlock Doors • Brake Type
• Sound Horn with Remote Start • Trailer Name
• Sound Horn with Remote Lock • Compass Variance
• Remote Unlock Sequence • Calibrate Compass
• Key Fob Linked to Me • Fuel Saver Display
• Passive Entry • Park Assist Front Chime Volume
• Park Assist Rear Chime Volume

149
ELECTRONICS

Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features

The Uconnect® system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature
settings such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings (Uconnect® 5.0,)
Trailer Brake, Suspension, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set-
tings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information through buttons on the touch-
screen.
• Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect® 5.0), or press the “Apps” button
(Uconnect® 8.4) located near the bottom of the touchscreen, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to access the Settings screen. When making
a selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press
the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. The following feature settings are available:
• Display • Suspension
• Voice • Audio
• Clock • Phone/Bluetooth®
• Safety & Driving Assistance • SiriusXM Setup
• Lights • Restore Settings
• Doors & Locks • Clear Personal Data
• Auto-On Comfort • System Information
• Engine Off Options • Compass Settings (Uconnect® 5.0)
• Trailer Brake

NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” found within “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” located in your Owner's Manual on the DVD for
further information.

Instrument Cluster Reconfigurable Screen Setup

The following settings allow you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.
Digital Speedometer
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Digital display icon is highlighted in
the EVIC/DID. Push the RIGHT arrow button to change the display between km/h
and mph.

150
 ELECTRONICS
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
• Push the UP or DOWN button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the
EVIC/DID Display. Push the RIGHT or LEFT to scroll through the following Vehicle
Info submenus:
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Air Suspension — If Equipped
• Coolant Temperature (Diesel Only)
• Transmission Temperature (ATX Only)
• Oil Temperature
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
• Fuel Filter Life (Diesel Only)
• Battery Voltage
• Exhaust Brake (Diesel Only)
• Turbo Boost (Diesel Only)
• Gauge Summary
• Coolant Temperature (Diesel Only)
• Transmission Temperature (ATX Only)
• Oil Temperature
• Oil Pressure
• Engine Hours

Trip A
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in the
EVIC/DID. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset the Trip A information.
Trip B
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the
EVIC/DID. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset the Trip B information.
Fuel Economy
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
The screen will display the following:
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
• Dual Tanks- If Equipped Heavy Duty only

Stop/Start
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Stop/Start icon is highlighted in the
EVIC/DID. Push the RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/Start status.

151
ELECTRONICS
Trailer Tow
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trailer Tow icon is highlighted. The
screen will display the following information:
• Trailer Trip Distance

Audio
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in
the EVIC/DID. This screen will display the current media source.

Screen Setup
• Push the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen
Setup sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information
is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink®)

HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor
designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.

Before You Begin Programming

HomeLink®
Ensure that your vehicle is parked out-
side of the garage before you begin pro-
gramming.
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency sig-
nal, it is recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to
the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition
switch into the ON/RUN position, then push Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
and hold the two outside HomeLink® but- Buttons
tons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until
the red indicator flashes.

152
 ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for
the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers that were manufactured after 1995. These
Garage Door Openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the Garage Door Opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button you want to program
and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold the buttons until the EVIC/DID display changes from “CHANNEL
# TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
NOTE:
If the EVIC/DID displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from Step 2.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly press and release the
“LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has
been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each time). The EVIC/DID will display
“CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If the garage door opener/device activates, program-
ming is complete.
NOTE:
If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
7. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

153
ELECTRONICS

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program
and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the EVIC/DID display changes from “CHAN-
NEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator
light.
NOTE:
If the EVIC/DID displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from Step 2.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now
occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time.

WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming
the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled
and can cause you and others to be severely injured or killed.

154
 ELECTRONICS

POWER INVERTER
A 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter outlet
is located on the lower instrument panel
next to the climate control knob. This out-
let can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring
power up to 150 Watts.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug
in the device. The outlet automatically
turns off when the device is unplugged.
NOTE:
The power inverter is designed with
built-in overload protection. If the power
rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power
inverter will automatically shut down. Power Inverter
Once the electrical device has been re-
moved from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset.

WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT:
• insert any objects into the receptacles
• touch with wet hands
Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide power for in-cab accesso-
ries designed for use with the standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”, together with either a key
symbol or a battery symbol.

155
ELECTRONICS
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations:
• Lower left and lower right in the center of the instrument panel – if equipped with
a column or a eight-speed electronic shifter.
• Inside the top storage tray.

Power Outlet — Center Console

• Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment — if equipped.

Power Outlet — Storage Compartment

• Rear of the center console storage compartment — Quad Cab® or Crew Cab.

Power Outlet — Rear Console

156
 ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object
in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use
of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
• The rear center console power outlet can be switched to “battery” powered all the
time by switching the power outlet rear center console fuse in the fuse panel.

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — F90 – F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console
2 — F104 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel

157
OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES

ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

The four position electronically shifted
transfer case provides four mode posi-
tions:
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
• Four-wheel drive high range
(4WD LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range
(4WD LOW)
• NEUTRAL (N)
This transfer case is intended to be
driven in the 2WD position for normal
street and highway conditions, such as
dry, hard-surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can
be used to lock the front and rear drive-
shafts together. Four-Position/Part Time Transfer Case

When operating your vehicle in 4WD 1 — Neutral Button

LOW, do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). 2 — Rotary 2WD/4WD Control Knob

Shifting Procedure
Shifting between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be made with the vehicle stopped or in
motion at speeds up to 55 mph (88 km/h).
Shifting between 2WD or 4WD LOCK into 4WD LOW must be made with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the vehicle stopped or rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).

NOTE:
It is preferred to have the engine running and the vehicle moving at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmis-
sion position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.

158
 OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
These five position electronically shifted
transfer cases provide five mode posi-
tions:
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
• Four-wheel drive automatic range
(4WD AUTO)
• Four-wheel drive lock range
(4WD LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range
(4WD LOW)
• NEUTRAL (N)
These electronically shifted transfer
cases are designed to be driven in the
two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for nor-
mal street and highway conditions on dry,
hard-surfaced roads. Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case

Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have 1 — Neutral Button

greater fuel economy benefits as the front 2 — Rotary 2WD/4WD Control Knob
axle is not engaged in 2WD.

Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case —

Eight Speed Transmission Only

159
OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
Shifting Procedure
Shifting between 2WD and 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion at speeds up to 55 mph (88 km/h).
Shifting between 2WD, 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK into 4WD LOW must be made
with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the vehicle stopped or rolling at 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
NOTE:
It is preferred to have the engine running and the vehicle moving at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmis-
sion position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.

160
 UTILITY

TONNEAU COVER
The Tonneau Cover can be removed and reinstalled by using the locking clamps
located underneath the Tonneau Cover.
NOTE:
Be sure that the Tonneau Cover is secured before driving.

EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate can be removed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or RKE the electrical connector must
be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.

Removing The Tailgate

1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera or RKE (if equipped).
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang
from the pivot.
3. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side pivot clears the hanger
bracket.
4. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side pivot.
5. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box.

Locking Tailgate
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The tailgate can be locked using the
vehicle key.

WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the exhaust system on
vehicles equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.

161
UTILITY

PICKUP BOX
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood, etc.) by building a raised
load floor. Place lumber across the box in the indentations provided above the wheel
housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side bulkheads of the box in front
of and behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side to
side to create separate load compartments in the pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the pickup box that can
sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450 kg) total.

Cargo Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that allows you to see a image
of the inside of the pickup box. The image will be displayed in the Uconnect® screen.
• A display timer is initiated when the cargo camera image is displayed. The image
will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the
vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the image is deactivated by touching
the Uconnect® display.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the cargo camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated by touching the Uconnect® display.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of the center high-mounted
stoplamp (CHMSL).
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the
lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

162
 UTILITY

Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN

1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button to turn the Cargo Camera system ON.
NOTE:
The Cargo Camera image may be deactivated by touching the Uconnect® display. The
previous selected screen will appear.

Cargo Camera Display

WARNING!
• The pickup box is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers,
who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
• Care should always be exercised when operating a vehicle with unrestrained
cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in vehicle damage. If
wide building materials are to be frequently carried, the installation of a
support is recommended. This will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to
the pickup box floor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of material suspended above
the wheelhouse, supports must be installed to transfer the weight of the load
to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result. The use of proper
supports will permit loading up to the rated payload.
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an accident causing serious or
fatal injury.

163
UTILITY

RAMBOX®

RamBox® Features
1 — Bed Extender
2 — Bed Rail Tie-Down System Adjustable Cleats
3 — Storage Bin
4 — Press The Button To Open

The RamBox® system is an integrated pickup box storage and cargo management
system consisting of three features:
• Integrated box side storage bins
• Cargo extender/divider
• Bed rail tie-down system

RamBox® Integrated Box Side Storage Bins

The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to
150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
• To open a storage bin, press and release the pushbutton located on the lid.
• The interior of the RamBox® will automatically illuminate when the lid is opened.
Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again will
turn the lights back on.
• Storage bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow water to drain from bins). To
remove plug, pull up on the edge. To install, push plug downward into drain hole.
164
 UTILITY
The RamBox® storage bins can be locked and unlocked using the vehicle key or the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and shelf supports. These
accessories (in addition to other RamBox® accessories) are available from MOPAR®.

RamBox® Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin, the storage bin cover
can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

Bed Extender
The bed extender has three functional positions:
• Storage Position
• Divider Position
• Extender Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of the truck bed.
To install the bed extender into the storage position, perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the
center handle vertically to release the extender side gates.
2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully forward in the bed against the
front panel.
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard ends to be positioned in front
of the cargo tie-down loops.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed
position.
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure the panel into place and
assist against theft.

165
UTILITY
Divider Position
There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels which allow for various positions
to assist in managing your cargo.
To install the bed extender into a divider position perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the
center handle vertically to release the extender side gates.
2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the outboard ends align with
the intended slots in the sides of the bed.
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends are secured into the
intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed
position.
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place and assist against theft.

Extender Position
The bed extender will add an additional 15 in (38 cm) in the back of the truck when
additional cargo room is needed.
To install the bed extender into the extender position, perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the center handle vertically in
order to release the extender side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle.
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure into place.

Bed Rail Tie-Down System

There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in
securing cargo.
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents, along either
rail, in order to keep cargo properly secure.
• To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut counterclockwise,
approximately three turns. Then, pull out on the cleat and slide it to the detent
nearest the desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
tighten the nut.
• To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end cap by pushing up on the
locking tab, located on the bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
rail.

166
 UTILITY

CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause damage to the vehicle:
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is properly secured.
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg) per bin.
• Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time could cause the vehicle
battery to discharge. If the lid is required to stay open for extended periods of
time, it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off manually using the
on/off switch.
• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before moving or driving vehicle.
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be minimized to prevent damage
to the lid and latching/hinging mechanisms.
• Damage to the RamBox® bin may occur due to heavy/sharp objects placed in
bin that shift due to vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential for damage,
secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect inside surfaces of bin from
heavy/sharp objects with appropriate padding.
• The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle
of the load on each cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal, or
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.

WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended or in
motion.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage bins. Once in the storage
bin, young children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the storage bin covers are not
properly latched.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
• To reduce the risk of potential injury or property damage:
• Cargo must be secured.
• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie-downs.
• Extender should not be used as cargo tie-down.
• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg) load on the
tailgate.
• The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in stowed or divider po-
sition with the tailgate closed.
• When in use, all handles are to be in the locked position.

167
UTILITY

TOWING & PAYLOAD

NOTE:
For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to
the following website addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com

TOW/HAUL MODE
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent
transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift
(for engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will il-
luminate in the instrument cluster to in-
dicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second
time restores normal operation. If the
TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch
must be pressed each time the engine is
started.

TOW/HAUL Switch

168
 UTILITY

INTEGRATED TRAILER BRAKE MODULE

The Integrated Trailer Brake Controller allows you to automatically or manually
activate the Electric Trailer Brakes and Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes for a
better braking performance when towing a trailer.
NOTE:
The Integrated Trailer Brake Controller is located in the center stack below the
climate controls.
This module will have four different options depending on the type of trailer you want
to tow and can be selected through the 3.5” Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or touchscreen radio.
• Light Electric
• Heavy Electric
• Light EOH (Electric Over Hydraulic)
• Heavy EOH (Electric Over Hydraulic)
Setting with the Uconnect® Touchscreen Radio To make the proper selection in the
Uconnect® touchscreen radio, press the More hard-key (Uconnect® 5.0) or the Apps
soft-key (Uconnect® 8.4), then press the Settings soft-key to display the menu
setting screen and press trailer brake. For additional information, refer to your
Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
Setting with a 3.5” EVIC
1. Press the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter “VEHICLE SETTINGS.”
2. Press the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
3. Press the RIGHT arrow and then press the UP or DOWN buttons until the proper
Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen. For additional information, refer to your
Owner’s Manual on the DVD.

169
UTILITY

GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)

• Pressing the +/- buttons, located on
the left side of the module, will
increase/decrease the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can
be increased to a maximum of 10 or
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no
trailer braking).
Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD
for further details.

1 — Decrease (-)
2 — Increase (+)

WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in
reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF Two-Wheel Four-Wheel Drive Models
The Ground Drive Models
See Instructions
• Automatic transmission in
NOT PARK
Flat Tow NONE • Manual transmission in gear
ALLOWED
(NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Front NOT NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK

170
 UTILITY
NOTE:
• When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and
provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
• Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode before
tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Air
Suspension – If Equipped” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed
in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened
to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault
codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.

NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride
Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission in PARK, manual
transmission in gear (not in NEUTRAL).
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the Key Fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels
in the straight position.

CAUTION!
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may leak from the transmission,
causing damage to internal parts.

171
UTILITY

Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models

NOTE:
Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases must be shifted into
NEUTRAL (N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into
PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle.

CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used while recreational towing. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe
damage to the transmission and or transfer case. Tow with all four wheels either
ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer). Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may leak from the transmission,
causing damage to internal parts.
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal damage to the transmis-
sion or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause
severe damage to the transfer case.
• Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be in NEUTRAL. To be
certain the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined
under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage will result, if
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL during towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in Neutral) for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under “Shifting
Into NEUTRAL” to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer
case, causing damage to internal parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper
face bar will be damaged.

172
 UTILITY
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.

WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine running. Firmly apply the
parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride
Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
• With electronic shift transfer case, press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) button. Some models have a small, recessed "N" button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be pressed using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. Other models have a rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary
transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will blink while
the shift is in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift
to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL
(N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions) for five
seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmis-
sion in first gear.

173
UTILITY
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn OFF the
engine. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear (NOT in
Neutral). On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK
when the engine is turned off.
11. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then cycle the key or the Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ button to the RUN position and back to the OFF position. Remove
the key fob from the ignition switch.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met before pressing the
NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pressing the NEUTRAL
(N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place and
for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine should be started and
left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once
every 24 hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride
height to compensate for temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. Depress the clutch pedal
on a manual transmission.
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever to the desired
position.

174
 UTILITY
• With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector switch, press and hold
the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
• With electronic shift transfer case with pushbutton selector switch, press and
hold the switch for the desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL (N)
indicator light turns off and the desired position indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N), turning the engine OFF is not
required, but may be helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic
transmission, the engine must remain running, since turning the engine OFF will
shift the transmission to PARK (and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the
transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is
turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual transmission).
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on
manual transmissions), and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before pressing the button to
shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pressing the button or
are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place and
for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.

175
1500 3.0L DIESEL

DIESEL ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

• The 3.0 turbocharged diesel engine does not require a break-in period due to its
construction. Normal operation is allowed, providing the following recommenda-
tions are followed:
• Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
• Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
• Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent engine lugging.
• Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indicators.
• Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
• Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying or towing significant
weight.

NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load operation will extend the
time before the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be
seen at this time.
• The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy
conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended
viscosity and quality grades are shown under “FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES”, under
“MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE” in this User Guide. NON-DETERGENT OR
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

DIESEL ENGINE STARTING PROCEDURES

Normal Starting Procedure
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Ensure the shift lever is in the PARK position.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once and the system will engage the starter to crank the engine.

NOTE:
• A delay of the start of up to five seconds is possible under very cold conditions.
The "Wait to Start" telltale will be illuminated during the pre-heat process, When
the engine Wait To Start light goes off the engine will automatically crank.
• If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, press
the button again.
4. Check that the oil pressure warning light has turned off.
5. Release the parking brake.

176
 1500 3.0L DIESEL

CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START the engine
before you drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage. Refer to
“Maintenance Procedures/Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” in your Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further information.

Extreme Cold Weather

The engine block heater is a resistance heater installed in the water jacket of the
engine. It requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
Its use is recommended for environments that routinely fall below -10°F. It should be
used when the vehicle has not been running overnight or longer periods and should
be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its use is required for cold starts with
temperatures under -20°F.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housing aids in preventing fuel gelling. It is
controlled by a built-in thermostat.
A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves engine starting and reduces the amount of
white smoke generated by a warming engine.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer.

Water In Fuel Message

If a Water In Fuel message or indicator appears in the cluster and a chime
sounds five times, the fuel/water separator will need to be drained immediately to
prevent engine damage.
Refer to “Draining Fuel Water Separator” in this guide for draining instructions or see
your dealer.

177
1500 3.0L DIESEL

DIESEL FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR

Draining Fuel/Water Separator
If the “Water in Fuel” indicator light is illuminated and an audible chime is
heard five times, you should stop the engine and drain the water from the separator.
The drain plug is located on the bottom of the Fuel Filter and Water Separator
assembly which is located above the rear axle next to the fuel tank.
Loosen the drain plug (located on the bottom filter assembly) then turn the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position to allow any accumulated water to drain.
When clean fuel is visible, close the drain and switch the ignition to the OFF position.
Refer to the Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.

Fuel Filter Replacement

1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter assembly.
3. Open the water drain valve, and let any accumulated water drain.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove bottom cover using a strap wrench. Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
Remove the used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing and dispose of according to
your local regulations.
7. Wipe the sealing surfaces of the lid and housing clean.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter housing and lubricate with
clean engine oil.

NOTE:
The WIF (Water In Fuel) sensor is re-usable. Service kit comes with new o-ring for
filter canister and WIF (Water In Fuel) sensor.

CAUTION!
• Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. Drain the filter into an
appropriate container.
• Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel filter. There is a
possibility debris could be introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It
is best to install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
• If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START the engine
before you drain water from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage.

178
 1500 3.0L DIESEL

EXHAUST REGENERATION
This engine meets all required EPA diesel engine emissions standards. To achieve
these emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine
and exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and
managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Additionally, your vehicle has the
ability to alert you to additional maintenance required on your vehicle or engine.
Refer to the following messages that may be displayed on your Driver Information
Display (DID).

Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now

This message Indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) reached 80% of its
maximum storage capacity.
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can
remedy the condition in the particulate filter system and allow your diesel engine and
exhaust after-treatment system to cleanse the filter to remove the trapped PM and
restore the system to normal operating condition.

Exhaust System — Regeneration in Process Exhaust Filter

XX% Full
Indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is self-cleaning. Maintain your
current driving condition until regeneration is completed.

Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed

This message indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) self-cleaning is
completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition.

Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now

This message indicates regeneration has been disabled due to a system malfunction.
The Powertrain control Module (PCM) will register a fault code and the instrument
panel will display the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

CAUTION!
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon
with continued operation.

179
1500 3.0L DIESEL

Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer

The PCM derates the engine in order to limit the likelihood of permanent damage to
the after-treatment system. If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is
not performed, extensive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. Have your
vehicle serviced by your local authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil and resetting the oil
change indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from
performing it's cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) and reduced engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to
correct this condition.

CAUTION!
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur with the
exhaust filter full.

COOL-DOWN IDLE CHART

TURBO "COOL DOWN" CHART
Idle Time
Driving Conditions Load Turbo Temp (in minutes) Before
Shut Down
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than 1
Stop and Go Medium Warm 1
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2
City Traffic Max. GCWR Warm 3
Highway Speeds Max. GCWR Warm 4
Uphill Grade Max. GCWR Hot 5

180
 1500 3.0L DIESEL

ADDING FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE ONLY

Your vehicle is equipped with a cap-less
fuel system.
Most fuel cans will not open the flapper
door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper
door to allow emergency refueling with a
fuel can.
Emergency Fuel Can Refueling
1. Retrieve funnel from the jack storage
area under the passenger seat.
2. Insert the funnel into same filler pipe
opening as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure the funnel is inserted fully to 1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill
hold flapper door open. Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location

4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.

5. Remove the funnel from filler pipe,
clean off prior to putting back in the
jack storage area under the passenger
seat.

1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill

Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
3 — Emergency Diesel Fuel Fill Funnel

181
1500 3.0L DIESEL

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known simply by the name of its active
component, UREA – is a key component of selective catalytic reduction (SCR)
systems, which help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF is a
liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic Reduction system in order to meet
the very stringent diesel emissions standards required by the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency. Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is the first and only technology in
decades to be as good for the environment as it is good for business and vehicle
performance.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted
from engines) that are harmful to our health and the environment to an almost
near-zero level. Small quantities of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) are injected into the
exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, convert smog-forming
nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe. You can operate with the comfort that your
vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
generations to come.

System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) injection system and a
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following components:
• DEF tank
• DEF pump
• DEF injector
• Electronically-heated DEF lines
• NOx sensors
• Temperature sensors
• SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst enable the achievement of diesel
emissions requirements; while maintaining outstanding fuel economy, drivability,
torque and power ratings.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system. You may occasionally hear
an audible clicking noise. This is normal operation.
• The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation.
182
 1500 3.0L DIESEL

Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid

The DEF gauge (located in the instrument panel) will display the level of DEF
remaining in the tank.
Completely fill the DEF tank through the diesel exhaust fluid fill location (located
behind the fuel door) at every maintenance interval or before if prompted by the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID).
NOTE:
• Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.) will effect the amount of
DEF that is used in your vehicle.
• Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic DEF heating system. This allows the DEF injection system to operate
properly at temperatures below 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for
an extended period of time with temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the
tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged.
Therefore, do not overfill the DEF tank. Extra care should be taken when filling
with portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the level of the DEF gauge in
your instrument cluster. On pickup applications, you may safely add a maximum of
2 gallons of DEF from portable containers when your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
DEF Fill Procedure
1. Remove cap from DEF tank (located behind the fuel door on drivers side of the
vehicle).
2. Insert DEF container or fill nozzle into
DEF fill location and fill DEF tank.
NOTE:
• The DEF gauge may take up to five
seconds to update after adding a
gallon or more of Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. If you
have a fault related to the DEF sys-
tem, the gauge may not update to
the new level. See your authorized
dealer for service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immedi-
ately update after a refill if the tem-
perature of the DEF fluid is below 1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill
12F (-11C). The DEF line heater will Location
possibly warm up the DEF fluid and 2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold
conditions, it is possible that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for several
drives.

183
1500 3.0L DIESEL
3. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank.
Refer to your Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.

CAUTION!
• To avoid DEF spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
• When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with water or a mild solvent.
• DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12 degrees F (-11 degrees C). The
DEF system is designed to work in temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could be damaged.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning Messages

Your vehicle will begin displaying warning messages when the DEF level reaches a
driving range of approximately 500 miles (800 km).
If the following warning message sequence is ignored, your vehicle may not restart
unless DEF is added within the displayed mileage shown in the DID message.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low Refill Soon – This message will display when
DEF driving range is less than 500 miles, DEF fluid top off is required with in the
displayed mileage. The message will be displayed in the DID during vehicle start up
with the current allowed mileage and accompanied by a single chime. The remaining
mileage can be pulled up anytime by way of the “Messages” list within the DID.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF – This message will display when DEF
driving range is less than 200 miles. It is also displayed at 150 miles and 100 miles.
DEF fluid top off is required with in the displayed mileage. The message will be
displayed in the DID during vehicle start up with an updated distance mileage, and
it will be accompanied by a single chime. Stating at 100 miles, remaining range will
be continuously displayed while operating the vehicle. Chimes will also accompany
the 75, 50 and 25 mile remaining distances. The DEF Low telltale will be on
continuously until DEF fluid is topped off.
Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF – This message will display when the DEF driving
range is less than 1 mile, DEF fluid top off is required or the engine will not restart.
The message will be displayed in the DID during vehicle start up, and it will be
accompanied by a single chime. The DEF Low telltale will be illuminated continu-
ously until DEF fluid tank is filled with a minimum of two gallons of DEF.

184
 1500 3.0L DIESEL

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning Messages

There are different messages which are displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced component
failures, or when tampering has been detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following warnings will display:
Service DEF System See Dealer – This message will display when the fault is initially
detected and each time the vehicle is started. The message will be accompanied by
a single chime and the Malfunction Indicator Light. We recommend you drive to your
nearest authorized dealer and have your vehicle serviced immediately. If not
corrected in 50 miles, vehicle will enter the “Engine Will not restart in XXXmi Service
DEF See dealer” warning stage and message.
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer – This message will display if the DEF system has
detected the incorrect fluid has been introduced to the DEF tank. The message will
be accompanied by a single chime. We recommend you drive to your nearest
authorized dealer and have your vehicle serviced immediately. If not corrected in
50 miles, vehicle will enter the Engine Will not restart in XXX mi Service DEF See
dealer warning stage and message.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF See Dealer – This message is first
displayed if the fault detected is not serviced after 50 miles of operation. It is also
displayed at 150 miles 125 miles and 100 miles. System service is required within
the displayed mileage. The message will be displayed in the DID during vehicle start
up with an updated distance mileage, and it will be accompanied by a single chime.
Starting at 100 miles, remaining range will be continuously displayed while operat-
ing the vehicle. Chimes will also accompany the 75, 50 and 25 mile remaining
distances. We recommend you drive to your nearest authorized dealer and have your
vehicle serviced immediately.
Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System See Dealer – This message will display if the
DEF system issue detected is not serviced during the allowed period. Your engine will
not restart unless your vehicle is serviced by your authorized dealer. This message will
be displayed when under 1 mile until the engine will not start and each time the
vehicle is started. The message will be continuously displayed and be accompanied
by a single chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will also be continuously
illumined. We highly recommend you drive to your nearest authorized dealer
immediately if the message appears while engine is running.
Engine Will Not Start Service DEF System See Dealer – This message will display when
the fault detected is not serviced after the Engine will not restart Service DEF System
See Dealer message is displayed on the next subsequent restart. Your engine will not
start unless you vehicle is serviced by your authorized dealer. The message will be
accompanied by a single chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will be continuously
illuminated. If the message appears and you can not start the engine, we recommend
you have your vehicle towed to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

185
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

DIESEL ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

The Cummins® turbocharged diesel engine does not require a break-in period due to
its construction. Normal operation is allowed, providing the following recommenda-
tions are followed:
• Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
• Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
• Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent engine lugging.
• Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indicators.
• Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
• Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying or towing significant
weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load operation will extend the
time before the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be
seen at this time.
Because of the construction of the Cummins® turbocharged diesel engine, engine
run-in is enhanced by loaded operating conditions which allow the engine parts to
achieve final finish and fit during the first 6,000 miles (10 000 km).

DIESEL ENGINE STARTING PROCEDURES

Engine Block Heater
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), engine block heater usage is recom-
mended.
For ambient temperatures below –20°F (-29°C), engine block heater usage is
required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood to the right side and can be
located just behind the grille near the headlamp.
Connect the heater cord to a ground-fault interrupter protected 110–115 volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
NOTE:
The block heater will require 110 volts AC and 6.5 amps to activate the heater
element.
The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the coolant.

186
 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

Water In Fuel Message

If a Water In Fuel message or indicator appears in the cluster and a chime
sounds five times, the fuel/water separator will need to be drained immediately to
prevent engine damage.
Refer to “Draining Fuel Water Separator” in this guide for draining instructions or see
your dealer.

Cold Start Procedure

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. If the Wait To Start light appears in
the cluster, wait for the light to turn off before starting.
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it may be beneficial to cycle the
manifold heaters twice before attempting to start the engine. This can be accom-
plished by turning the ignition OFF for at least five seconds and then back ON after
the “Wait To Start Light” has turned off, but before the engine is started. However,
excessive cycling of the manifold heaters will result in damage to the heater elements
or reduced battery voltage.
Refer to the Owner's Manual Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.

Engine Idling
Avoid prolonged engine idling. Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine
because combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not
burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings, engine
valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
If the engine is allowed to idle, under some conditions the idle speed may increase
to 900 RPM then return to normal idle speed. This is normal operation.

WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. Damage to the 110–115 volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.

187
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE (ENGINE BRAKING)

The Exhaust Brake switch is located on the switch bank below the audio system. This
switch is used to enable exhaust brake modes.
Pressing the exhaust brake switch once will enable full strength exhaust brake mode,
indicated by a yellow icon in the EVIC/DID. This mode applies full exhaust braking
when the accelerator pedal is released. This is most useful for slowing the vehicle.
Pressing the exhaust brake switch again will enable the Smart Brake feature,
indicated by a green icon in the EVIC/DID. This feature is intended to maintain the
vehicle speed present when the accelerator pedal is released. However, when the
brakes are applied, full exhaust braking is still enabled to slow the vehicle.
A third press of the brake switch will turn the exhaust brake off, and will extinguish
the exhaust brake icon in the EVIC/DID.

NOTE:
In general, higher engine speeds result in higher exhaust braking force. For optimum
braking power, it is recommended to use the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL
mode.

CAUTION!
Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not recommended and could lead to engine
damage.

WARNING!
Do not use the exhaust brake feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as
the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to
swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which may cause a collision
possibly resulting in personal injury or death.

188
 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

IDLE-UP FEATURE (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ONLY)

Speed Control Switches

1 — Push CANCEL
2 — Push ON/OFF
3 — Push Resume/Accel
4 — Push Set/Decel

The Idle-Up Feature uses the speed control switches to increase engine idle speed
and quickly warm the vehicle’s interior. This feature must be enabled by your dealer.
See your local dealer.
With the transmission in PARK, the parking brake applied, and the engine running,
push the speed control ON/OFF switch on, then push the SET switch.
The engine RPM will go up to 1100 RPM. To increase the RPM, push and hold the
RESUME/ACCEL switch and the idle speed will increase to approximately 1500 RPM.
To decrease the RPM, push and hold the SET/DECEL switch and the idle speed will
decrease to approximately 1100 RPM.
To cancel the Idle Up Feature, either push the CANCEL switch, push the ON/OFF
switch or push the brake pedal.

189
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR

Draining Fuel/Water Separator
If the “Water in Fuel” indicator light is illuminated and an audible chime is
heard five times, you should stop the engine and drain the water from the separator.
The drain is located on the bottom of the Fuel Filter and Water Separator assembly
which is located on the driver's side of the engine.
Turn the drain valve (located on the side of the filter) counterclockwise 1/4 turn, then
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position to allow any accumulated water to
drain.
When clean fuel is visible, close the drain and switch the ignition to OFF.
Refer to the Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.

Fuel Filter Replacement

1. With the engine off and a drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose, open the water
drain valve 1/4 turn counterclockwise and completely drain fuel and water into
the approved container.
2. Close the water drain valve and remove the lid using a socket or strap wrench;
rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove the used o-ring and discard it.
3. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing and dispose of according to
your local regulations.
4. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and housing and install the new o-ring
into ring groove on the filter housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
5. Install a new filter in the housing. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
properly seated. Do not pre-fill the filter housing with fuel.
6. Install the lid onto the housing and tighten to 22.5 ft lbs (30.5 N·m). Do not
overtighten the lid.
7. Start the engine and confirm no leaks are present.
The engine mounted filter housing is equipped with a No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR)
feature. Engine will not run if:
• No filter is installed.
• Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use of OEM filter is required to ensure vehicle
will run.

190
 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

CAUTION!
• Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. Drain the filter into an
appropriate container.
• Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel filter. There is a
possibility debris could be introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It
is best to install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
• If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START the engine
before you drain water from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage.

UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR

Draining Fuel/Water Separator
If the “Water in Fuel” indicator light is illuminated and an audible chime is
heard five times, you should stop the engine and drain the water from the separator.
The drain is located on the bottom of the Fuel Filter and Water Separator assembly
which is located in front of the rear axle above the drive shaft on pick up models. The
Chassis Cab models second filter location is on the frame behind the front axle. The
best access to this water drain valve is from under the vehicle.
• Turn the drain valve (located on the side of the filter) counterclockwise 1 full turn,
then turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position to allow any accumulated
water to drain.
• When clean fuel is visible, close the drain and switch the ignition to OFF.
• Refer to the Diesel Supplement on the DVD for further details.

Underbody Fuel Filter Replacement

1. With the engine off and a drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose, open the water
drain valve 1 full turn counterclockwise and completely drain fuel and water into
the approved container.
2. Close the water drain valve and remove the lid using a socket or strap wrench;
rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove the used o-ring and discard it.
3. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing and dispose of according to
your local regulations.
4. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and housing and install the new o-ring
into ring groove on the filter housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
5. Install a new filter in the housing. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
properly seated. Do not pre-fill the filter housing with fuel.
6. Start the engine and confirm no leaks are present.

191
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL
The underbody mounted filter housing will cause the engine not to run if:
• No filter is installed.
NOTE:
• Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer's filtration and water
separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
• The WIF sensor is re-usable. Service kit comes with new o-ring for filter canister
and WIF sensor.

CAUTION!
• Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. Drain the filter into an
appropriate container.
• Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel filter. There is a
possibility debris could be introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It
is best to install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
• If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START the engine
before you drain water from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage.

EXHAUST REGENERATION
Under certain conditions, your Cummins® diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment
system may never reach the conditions required to remove the trapped particulate
matter. If this occurs, the “Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now” message
will be displayed on the EVIC/DID screen in your cluster and you will hear one chime
to alert you of this condition. Driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as little as 45
minutes can remedy the condition and allow the engine and exhaust after-treatment
system to remove the trapped particulate matter.
NOTE:
Under typical operating conditions, NO indications of regeneration state will be
displayed. If you do reach 80% of filter capacity, the following messages will assist
you in inducing and understanding the regeneration process.

Perform Service
Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set interval. To help remind you
when this maintenance is due, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Driver Information Display (DID) will display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
Service” message is displayed on the EVIC/DID it is necessary to have the emissions
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may include replacing the Closed
Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) filter element, and cleaning of the EGR Cooler. The
procedure for clearing and resetting the “Perform Service” indicator message is
located in the appropriate Service Information.

192
 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now

“Exhaust System—Regeneration Required Now” will be displayed on the EVIC/DID if
the exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity.

Exhaust Filter XX% Full

Indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is approaching full.

Exhaust System — Regeneration in Process Exhaust Filter XX% Full

Indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is self-cleaning. Maintain your
current driving condition until regeneration is completed.

Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed

This message indicates that the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) self-cleaning is
completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition.

Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now

This message indicates regeneration has been disabled due to a system malfunction.
The Powertrain control Module (PCM) will register a fault code and the instrument
panel will display the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

CAUTION!
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon
with continued operation.

Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer

The PCM derates the engine in order to limit the likelihood of permanent damage to
the after-treatment system. If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is
not performed, extensive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. Have your
vehicle serviced by your local authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil and resetting the oil
change indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from
performing it's cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) and reduced engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to
correct this condition.

CAUTION!
See your authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur with the
exhaust filter full.

193
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

COOL-DOWN IDLE CHART

TURBO "COOL DOWN" CHART
Idle Time
Driving Conditions Load Turbo Temp (in minutes) Before
Shut Down
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than 1
Stop and Go Medium Warm 1
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2
City Traffic Max. GCWR Warm 3
Highway Speeds Max. GCWR Warm 4
Uphill Grade Max. GCWR Hot 5

ADDING FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE ONLY

Your vehicle is equipped with a cap-less
fuel system.
Most fuel cans will not open the flapper
door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper
door to allow emergency refueling with a
fuel can.

1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill

Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location

194
 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL
Emergency Fuel Can Refueling
1. Retrieve funnel from the jack storage area under the passenger seat.
2. Insert the funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure the funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove the funnel from filler pipe,
clean off prior to putting back in the
jack storage area under the passenger
seat.

1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill

Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
3 — Emergency Diesel Fuel Fill Funnel

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known simply by the name of its active
component, UREA – is a key component of selective catalytic reduction (SCR)
systems, which help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF is a
liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic Reduction system in order to meet
the very stringent diesel emissions standards required by the Environmental Protec-
tion Agency. Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is the first and only technology in
decades to be as good for the environment as it is good for business and vehicle
performance.

195
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted
from engines) that are harmful to our health and the environment to an almost
near-zero level. Small quantities of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) are injected into the
exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, convert smog-forming
nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe. You can operate with the comfort that your
vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
generations to come.

System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) injection system and a
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following components:
• DEF tank
• DEF pump
• DEF injector
• Electronically-heated DEF lines
• DEF control module
• NOx sensors
• NH3 sensor
• Temperature sensors
• SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst enable the achievement of diesel
emissions requirements; while maintaining outstanding fuel economy, drivability,
torque and power ratings.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system. You may occasionally hear
an audible clicking noise. This is normal operation.
• The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation.

196
 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very stable product with a long shelf life.
If DEF is kept in temperatures between 10° to 90°F (-12° to 32°C), it will last a
minimum of one year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze
at temperatures at or below 12° F (-11° C). The system has been designed to operate
in this environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact with DEF must be DEF compatible
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel
should be avoided as they are subject to corrosion by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely.

Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid

The DEF gauge (located in the instrument cluster) will display the level of DEF
remaining in the tank.
Completely fill the DEF tank through the diesel exhaust fluid fill location at every
maintenance interval or before if prompted by the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID).
NOTE:
• Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.) will effect the amount of
DEF that is used in your vehicle.
• Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic DEF heating system. This allows the DEF injection system to operate
properly at temperatures below 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for
an extended period of time with temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the
tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged.
Therefore, do not overfill the DEF tank. Extra care should be taken when filling
with portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the level of the DEF gauge in
your instrument cluster. On pickup applications, you may safely add a maximum of
2 gallons of DEF from portable containers when your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
On Chassis Cab applications a maximum of 2 gallons may be added when the DEF
gauge is reading ¾ full.

197
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL
DEF Fill Procedure
1. Remove cap from DEF tank (located behind the fuel door on drivers side of the
vehicle).
2. Insert DEF container or fill nozzle into
DEF fill location and fill DEF tank.
3. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank.
Refer to your Diesel Supplement on the
DVD for further details.

1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill

Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location

CAUTION!
• To avoid DEF spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
• When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with water or a mild solvent.
• DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12 degrees F (-11 degrees C). The
DEF system is designed to work in temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could be damaged.

198
 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning Messages

Your vehicle will begin displaying warning messages when the DEF level reaches a
driving range of approximately 350 miles (563 km). If the following warning message
sequence is ignored, your vehicle may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 MPH
(8 km/H) unless DEF is added.
DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will display when the low level is reached, during
vehicle start up, and with increased frequency during vehicle operation. It will be
accompanied by a single chime. Approximately 5 gallons (19 Liters) of DEF is
required to refill the tank when this message is initially displayed on pickup
applications, and approximately 7 gallons (28 Liters) are required on chassis-cab
applications.
Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF — This message will continuously display
if the “DEF Low Refill Soon” message is ignored, and the frequency of occurance of
the chime will increase unless up to 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF is added to the tank.
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or Refuel Refill DEF — This message will
continuously display when the counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied by a
periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of 5 MPH upon the first of the
following conditions to occur:
• If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
• If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of time, approximately one hour or
greater.
• If the system detects that the level of fuel in the tank has increased.
Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF to the tank in order to avoid vehicle
operation at a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/H).
5 MPH Max Speed Refill DEF — The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed
of 5 MPH (8 km/H) when this message is displayed. Add up to 2.5 gallons (7.5 Liters)
of DEF to the tank to restore normal vehicle operation.

NOTE:
A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be required to restore normal vehicle
operation. Although the vehicle will start normally and can be placed in gear after this
message has been initially displayed, extreme caution should be utilized since the
vehicle will only be capable of maneuvering at a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/H).

199
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning Messages

There are four different messages which are displayed if the vehicle detects that the
DEF system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced component
failures, or when tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be limited to a
maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/H) if the DEF system is not serviced within less than
250 miles (402 km) of the fault being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following warnings will display:
Service DEF System – See Dealer — This message will display when the fault is initially
detected, each time the vehicle is started, and periodically during driving. The
message will be accompanied by a single chime. We recommend you drive to your
nearest authorized dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF System See Dealer — This message will
display if the DEF system has not been serviced after the “Service DEF System – See
Dealer” message is displayed. This message will continuously display until the
mileage counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. The
message will continue to countdown until it reaches zero unless the vehicle is
serviced. We recommend you drive to your nearest authorized dealer and have your
vehicle serviced immediately.
NOTE:
Under some circumstances this mileage counter may start with a value of less than
150 miles (241 km). For example, if recurring faults are detected in a time interval
of less than 40 hours, the counter may restart at the value where it stopped when a
previous fault was temporarily remedied, or at a minimum of 50 miles (80 km).
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or Refuel Service DEF See Dealer — This
message will continuously display when the mileage counter reaches zero, and will
be accompanied by a periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of 5 MPH upon the first of the
following conditions to occur:
• If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
• If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of time, approximately one hour or
greater.
• If the system detects that the level of fuel in the tank has increased.
5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See Dealer — This message will continuously
display, and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. Although the vehicle can be
started and placed in gear, the vehicle will only operate at a maximum speed of
5 MPH. Your vehicle will require towing, see your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the engine can still be started. However, the vehicle
will only operate at a maximum speed of 5 MPH.

200
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Dial toll-free 1-800-521-2779 for U.S. Residents or 1-800-363-4869 for Canadian
Residents.
• Provide your name, vehicle identification number, license plate number, and your
location, including the telephone number from which you are calling.
• Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few simple questions.
• You will be given the name of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival.
If you feel you are in an “unsafe situation”, please let us know. With your consent,
we will contact local police or safety authorities.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING LIGHTS

- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible.
While driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions. To improve the vehicle's traction when starting off in deep
snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch the ESC system off.

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Light

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly, when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
IF THE LIGHT STARTS FLASHING INDICATING A LOW TIRE PRESSURE, ADJUST THE AIR
PRESSURE IN THE LOW TIRE TO THE AIR PRESSURE SHOWN ON THE VEHICLE PLACARD OR
TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE LABEL LOCATED ON THE DRIVER'S DOOR.
NOTE:
After inflation, the vehicle may need to be driven for 20 minutes before the flashing light
will turn off.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue each time the vehicle is restarted as long as
the malfunction exists.

201
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
NOTE:
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12° F (7° C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature is 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermar-
ket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.

- Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition.
If the light turns on and a warning chime sounds while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately.
We recommend that you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have
the vehicle serviced immediately.

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant.

202
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

- Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid
level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected.
If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to
a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on
until the cause is corrected.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake
Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch
from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake
is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree
of brake application.

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.

203
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

- Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called
OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light
will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical
driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants
or others.

- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate when the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
turned off.

- Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the charging system
light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system.
We recommend you do not continue driving if the charging system light is on. Have
the vehicle serviced immediately.

- Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four
minutes when this light turns on.
We recommend you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.
204
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

- Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE
warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.

- Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the
PARK position; the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized service center immediately. If the light is flashing when
the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require
towing.

- Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” of your Owner’s Manual for further information.
NOTE:
The Air Bag System is designed to be maintenance free.

- SERV (Service) 4WD Indicator Light

The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift four-wheel drive system. If the SERV
4WD light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly and that service is required.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indicator will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID).

205
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

- Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might
occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle, with the transmission in NEUTRAL, until the light turns
off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.

CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

Oil Change Indicator

Message
If an “oil change” message (shown as “Change Oil Soon” and “Oil Change Needed”)
appears and a single chime sounds, it is time for your next required oil change.
Resetting The Light After Servicing
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

- Low Coolant Level Indicator Light

This light indicates low coolant level. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
We recommend you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have the
vehicle serviced immediately.

206
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INDICATOR LIGHTS

- Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is
operated. A tone will chime, and a EVIC/DID message will appear if either turn signal
is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE:
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.

- High Beam Indicator

Indicates that headlights are on high beam.

- Park/Headlight ON Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

- Front Fog Light Indicator

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

- Vehicle Security Light

This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is
set. The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is
first turned on.

— Tow/Haul Mode
Indicates that the Tow/Haul Mode is active.

— Four Wheel Drive Auto

Indicates that the Four Wheel Drive has engaged automatically.

— Electronic Stability Control OFF

This light indicates the ESC system has been turned off by the driver.

— Cargo Light
Indicates that the rear cargo light is on.

— Door Ajar
Indicates that one of the vehicles doors is open.

207
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

— Electronic Speed Control Set

Indicates that the Electronic Speed Control has been set.

- Fuel Cap/Loose Gas Cap Message

If a “gas cap” message appears, tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is heard.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the message continues to appear for more than three days after tightening the gas
cap, see your authorized service center.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by
taking the appropriate action:
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL, but do not
increase engine idle speed.

NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the
engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to
floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately, and call for service.

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

208
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat.

Removal Of Jack And Tools

• To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover,
located on the side of the seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover
(closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once the front
of the cover is loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from
the seat frame.

Jack And Tools Location

1500 Series Trucks
• Remove the jack and tool bag by removing the wing bolt and sliding the jack and
tool bag from under the seat.

Wing Bolt Location

209
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2500/3500 Series Trucks
• Remove the jack and tool bracket assembly by removing the wing bolt and sliding
the jack and tool bracket assembly from under the seat.

Jack And Tool Bracket Assembly

Removing The Spare Tire

• Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert the tube through the access hole between
the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.
Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through
the center of the wheel.
NOTE:
Always stow the spare tire with the valve stem facing the ground.
• It is recommended that you stow the
flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose
cable.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for
use with the jack extension tube only.
Use of an air wrench or other power tools
is not recommended and can damage the
winch.

Wheel Wrench/Spare Tire

1 — Wheel 2 — Spare Tire
Wrench

210
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK. On four-wheel drive vehicles, shift the transfer
case to the 4L position.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
• Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position.
For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the ve-
hicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

Wheel Blocked

Instructions
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and
tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but
do not remove, the wheel nuts by
turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.

Warning Label

211
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Placement of the jack:
1500 Series Trucks
• When changing a front wheel, place the scissors jack under the rear portion of the
lower control arm as shown below.

Front 4x2 Jacking Location

Front 4x4 Jacking Location

212
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench. The tube
extension may be used but is not required.
• For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube
to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under
the axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the drive tubes extending
to the rear.

Rear 4x4 Jacking Location

• Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

213
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2500/3500 Series Trucks
• For 2500/3500 4x2 series trucks, when changing a front wheel, place the bottle
jack under the frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward as
possible on the straight part of the frame.

Jacking Location

• Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench. The tube
extension, may be used, but is not required.

214
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• For 2500/3500 4x4 series trucks, when changing the front wheel, assemble the
jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place
the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes
extending to the front. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
• For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing
a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive
tube to the extension tube. Place the
jack under the axle between the spring
and the shock absorber with the drive
tubes extending to the rear.
• Connect the jack tube extension and
wheel wrench.
NOTE:
If the bottle jack will not lower by turning
the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be
necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Front Jacking Location
• By rotating the wheel wrench clock-
wise, raise the vehicle until the wheel
just clears the surface.
• Remove the wheel nuts and pull the
wheel off. On single rear-wheel (SRW)
trucks, install the spare wheel and
wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. On
3500 dual rear-wheel models (DRW)
the wheel nuts are a two-piece assem-
bly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the
wheel nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing
the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Rear Jacking Location

215
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Using the lug wrench, finish tightening the wheel nuts using a crisscross pattern.
The correct wheel nut tightness is 130 ft lbs (176 N·m) torque (1500 Series),
135 ft lbs (183 N·m) torque for 2500/3500 single-rear wheel (SRW) models, and
140 ft lbs (190 N·m) for 3500 dual rear-wheel models. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
• Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks. Do not install chrome
or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
• Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle jack will not lower by
turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive
tube in order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously
described.
• Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated
wheel nuts.

Reinstalling The Jack And Tools

1500 Series Trucks
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw clockwise until
the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the
jack turn-screw.
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.

Jack And Tool Bag

216
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding the jack by the jack
turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages
into the fastener on the floor.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack slides into the front
hold down location.

Floor Fastener Location

5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.

Wing Bolt Location

217
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2500/3500 Series Trucks
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw clockwise until
the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly. Make sure the lug wrench is
under the jack near the jack turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips.
Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn screw until jack is snug into
bracket assembly.
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage position holding the jack
by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom
slot engages into the fastener on the floor.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack and tool bracket
assembly slides into the front hold down
location.
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure
to the floor pan. Reinstall the plastic
cover.

Floor Fastener Location

Hub Caps/Wheel Covers
• The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground.
• For single rear-wheel (SRW) models, use the blade on the end of the lug wrench
to pry the hub cap off. Insert the blade end into the pry-off notch and carefully pop
off the hub cap with a back-and-forth motion.
• On models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must first remove the hub caps. The
jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the rear
hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the ratchet firmly. The hub cap should
pop off. The wheel skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap use the blade
on the end of the lug wrench to pry the caps off. The wheel skin can now be
removed.
• You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the wheel skins. Insert the
flat tip completely and using a back-and-forth motion, loosen the wheel skin.
Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
• Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When replacing the hub caps,
tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with
a rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated
around the wheel.
218
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel
studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles/kilometers of operation to
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly
seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended
torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt
circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened
until final torque is achieved. Recommended torques are shown in the following
chart.
Disc Wheels
Nut Type Stud Size Hex Size Torque Ft Lbs Torque Newton
Meters
Cone M14 x 1.5 22 mm 130 176
Flanged M14 x 1.5 22 mm 140 190

8-Stud — Dual Rear Wheels

• Dual wheels are flat-mounted and center-piloted. The lug nuts are a two-piece
assembly. When the tires are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and
add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer.
• Slots in the wheels will assist in prop-
erly orienting the inner and outer
wheels. Align these slots when assem-
bling the wheels for best access to the
tire valve on the inner wheel. The tires
of both dual wheels must be com-
pletely off the ground when tightening,
to ensure wheel centering and maxi-
mum wheel clamping.
• Dual wheel models require a special
heavy-duty lug nut tightening adapter
Oil Interface Location
(included with the vehicle) to correctly
tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is
necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle lifting
device.
NOTE:
When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire
diameter of the two individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant
difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front location. The correct direction
of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed.

219
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:
1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the num-
bered sequence to a snug fit.
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same
sequence to the torques listed in the
table. Go through the sequence a sec-
ond time to verify that specific torque
has been achieved. Retighten to
specifications at 100 miles (160 km)
and after 500 miles (800 km).
• It is recommended that wheel stud
nuts be kept torqued to specifications Wheel Nuts Numbered Sequence
at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.

To Stow The Flat Or Spare

NOTE:
RAM 1500 vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot be stored under the
vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure
the flat tire in the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
• Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the wheel retainer through the
center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening.
• For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow with the valve stem
toward the rear of the vehicle.
• Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the winch mechanism until
the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to
rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It
cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly
in place.

CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those
indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
• Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that the jack will not
damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.
• Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap. Do not use a twisting
motion when removing the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry off notches. Make sure
that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.

220
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under
a raised vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack
should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway
as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK;
a manual transmission in REVERSE.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle
during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares
must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.
• Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less
stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the ve-
hicle only enough to remove the tire.
• To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten
the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in personal injury.
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to
avoid contact with any sharp edges.
• A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could en-
danger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided.
• A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the
occupants in the vehicle. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or re-
placed immediately.

221
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack.
Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures
in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating
instructions and precautions.

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a
system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode
and cause personal injury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind
the left headlight assembly.

NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.

Battery Positive Post

222
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the
ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the
jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground
connection and personal injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system
of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.

NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post
of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.

223
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.

WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result
in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a
few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the positive battery terminal.
The resulting electrical current will blow the fuse.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)
post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery
and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in
long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

224
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS

• If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are mounted in the front.
• For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to
minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle. Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle; chains may cause
vehicle damage.

WARNING!
• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break,
causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps and chains may
break, causing serious injury.

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position,
you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever.
Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer immediately if the shift
lever override has been used.

Column Shifter
1. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up
position and firmly set the parking
brake.
2. Turn the Key Fob to the ACC or ON/RUN
position without starting the engine.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on
the brake pedal.
4. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool,
into the access port (ringed circle) on
the bottom of the steering column and
push and hold the override release
lever up.
5. Move the shift lever into the NEU-
TRAL position and start the vehicle. Shift Lock Manual Override Access Port

6. Release the parking brake.

225
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Center Console Shifter

• Firmly set the parking brake.
• Turn the Key Fob to the ACC or ON/RUN
position without starting the engine.
• Press and maintain firm pressure on
the brake pedal.
• Using a screwdriver, press and hold
the override tab through the access
port on the center console.
• Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL
position and start the vehicle.
• Release the parking brake.

Shift Lock Manual Override Cover

MANUAL PARK RELEASE — EIGHT SPEED TRANSMISSION

• In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift
out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
• Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
• Firmly apply the parking brake.
• Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the Manual Park Release
access cover, which is just above the parking brake release handle, below and
to the left of the steering column.

Manual Park Release Access Cover

226
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual Park Release lever
locking tab (just below the middle of the lever) to the right.

Manual Park Release Lever Locking Tab

• While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap
to rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in place pointing towards the driver's
seat. Release the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park Release lever is
locked in the released position.
• The vehicle is now out of PARK and
can be towed. Release the parking
brake only when the vehicle is se-
curely connected to a tow vehicle.

Manual Park Release Tether

227
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
• Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
• Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its original position, until the
locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.
• Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed
position.
• Re-install the access cover.

WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating
the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your
vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle
could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

Towing Wheels OFF the
2WD Models 4WD Models
Condition Ground
• Auto Transmission
in PARK
• Manual Transmis-
If transmission is operable: sion in gear
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
Flat Tow NONE (NOT NEUTRAL)
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
• Transfer Case in
• 15 miles (24 km) max
NEUTRAL
distance
• Tow in FORWARD
direction
Wheel Lift or Front NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD

228
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

• If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using
a rocking motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with
automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission)
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
NOTE:
Press the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
"Partial Off" mode before rocking the vehicle. Once the vehicle has been freed, press
the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.

CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating
and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheat-
ing and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE/2nd and REVERSE,
do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

229
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

230
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

OPENING THE HOOD

1. Pull the hood release lever located
below the steering wheel at the base
of the instrument panel.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the
center of the hood and move the
safety latch lever while lifting the
hood at the same time.

Hood Release Lever Location

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure
to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

231
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine

1. Air Cleaner Filter

2. Engine Oil Fill (Under Cover)
3. Brake Fluid Reservoir
4. Battery
5. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

232
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6. Washer Fluid Reservoir

7. Engine Coolant Reservoir
8. Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
9. Engine Oil Dipstick

233
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

5.7L Engine

1. Air Cleaner Filter

2. Transmission Fluid Dipstick
3. Engine Oil Fill
4. Brake Fluid Reservoir
5. Battery

234
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6. Engine Oil Dipstick

7. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8. Washer Fluid Reservoir
9. Engine Coolant Reservoir
10. Engine Coolant Pressure Cap

235
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6.4L Engine

1. Engine Coolant Reservoir

2. Transmission Fluid Dipstick
3. Engine Oil Fill
4. Brake Fluid Reservoir
5. Aux Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6. Battery

236
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

7. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

8. Washer Fluid Reservoir
9. Power Steering Reservoir
10. Engine Oil Dipstick
11. Air Cleaner Filter

237
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3.0L Diesel Engine

1. Air Cleaner Filter

2. Engine Oil Fill
3. Brake Fluid Reservoir
4. Aux Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5. Battery

238
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

7. Washer Fluid Reservoir
8. Engine Coolant Reservoir
9. Engine Oil Dipstick

239
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6.7L Diesel Engine With 68RFE Transmission — If Equipped

1. Batteries
2. Engine Coolant Reservoir
3. Transmission Fluid Dipstick
4. Brake Fluid Reservoir
5. Aux Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6. Washer Fluid Reservoir

240
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

7. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

8. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
9. Engine Oil Dipstick
10. Engine Oil Fill
11. Air Cleaner Filter

241
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6.7L Diesel Engine With AS69RC Transmission — If Equipped

1. Batteries
2. Engine Coolant Reservoir
3. Transmission Fluid Dipstick
4. Brake Fluid Reservoir
5. Auz Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

242
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

7. Washer Fluid Reservoir

8. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
9. Engine Oil Dipstick
10. Engine Oil Fill
11. Air Cleaner Filter

243
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

GAS FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab
32 Gallons 121 Liters
Models (Optional)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20,
6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
API Certified)
5.7L Engines (We recommend you use
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-30,
API Certified), for 2500/3500 trucks operating
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
under a gross combined weight rating greater than
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).
6.4L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40
engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.)
Cooling System
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106.)
5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend
you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula that meets the require-
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.)
5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend
you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements
of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.)
6.4 Liter Engine – MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets
16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12106.

244
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

GAS FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified
SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the re-
quirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved
to Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395
may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified
SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the re-
quirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine 2500/3500 trucks We recommend you use API Certified
operating under a gross combined weight rat- SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the re-
ing greater than 14,000 lbs/(6,350 kg.) quirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent. Refer to your
engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 6.4L For best performance and maximum pro-
tection under all types of operating condi-
tions, the manufacturer only recommends
full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) cat-
egories of SN. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40
or equivalent MOPAR® engine oil meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® brand
Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark
Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L/6.4L Engines 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recom-
mended.

245
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products.
Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.

E-85 Flexible Fuel — 3.6L Engine Only

CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a yellow gas cap can operate on
E-85.

Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.

Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™
Automatic Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equiva-
lent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed Auto- Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
matic with Gasoline Engine (For Diesel Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may
Engine see Diesel Supplement) affect the function or performance of your
transmission. We recommend MOPAR®
ATF+4® fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR®
BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5
Models Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.

246
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Rear Axle – 1500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR® Syn-
thetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140
(MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require
the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR®
Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500 Models We recommend you use Synthetic, GL-5
SAE, 75W-90. Limited slip additive is not
required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3. If
DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir – We recommend you use MOPAR® Power
2500/3500 Models Steering Fluid +4 or MOPAR® ATF+4® Au-
tomatic Transmission Fluid.

1500 3.0 DIESEL FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Diesel Engine 26 Gallons 98.5 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 8 Gallons 30.3 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-30
10.5 Quarts 10 Liters
Synthetic, API Certified Low Ash)
Cooling System
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine (MOPAR®
Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 10 Year/
11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology))

1500 3.0 DIESEL FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
Coolant 150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Only use ACEA C3 5W-30 Synthetic Low Ash engine oil meeting
Engine Oil Chrysler material standard MS-11106 or Pennzoil Ultra Euro L full
synthetic 5W-30 motor oil.
Engine Oil
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
Filter

247
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use MOPAR® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron
rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers filtration
Fuel Filters
and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life
and reliability.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle.
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum)
to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specifi-
Fuel Selection cation D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. We recom-
mend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specifi-
cation D-975 with your diesel engine.This vehicle is compatible with
biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance
intervals are followed as directed.
MOPAR® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that
Diesel Exhaust
has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not
Fluid
API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.

NOTE:
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to
operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized No. 2
diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide
better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filter.

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products.
Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.

248
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Only use Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® BW44–44 Transfer Case
Fluid.
Front Axle – 1500 Four- We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Wheel Drive Models Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubri-
cant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles
require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR® Limited
Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Standard Cab Longbed Models 28 Gallons 106 Liters
2500/3500 Crew/Mega Cab Shortbed
31 Gallons 129 Liters
Models
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models 32 Gallons 132 Liters
Standard Rear Tank – Chassis Cab Only 52 Gallons 197 Liters
Optional Midship Tank – Chassis Cab
22 Gallons 83 Liters
Only
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank (Approximate)
5.5 Gallons 21 Liters
– 2500/3500 Models
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank (Approximate)
9 Gallons 34 Liters
– Chassis Cab
Engine Oil With Filter
6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
Cooling System
6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine (MOPAR® Engine
Coolant/Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 Mile 5.7 Gallons 21.4 Liters
Formula)

249
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
Engine Coolant
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use
15W-40 engine oil such as MOPAR®, Shell Rotella® and Shell
Rimula® that meets Chrysler Materials Standard MS-10902 and the
API CJ-4 engine oil category is required. Products meeting Cummins®
CES 20081 may also be used. The identification of these engine oils
Engine Oil is typically located on the back of the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use
5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as MOPAR®, Shell Rotella® and Shell
Rimula® that meets Chrysler Materials Standard MS-10902 and the
API CJ-4 engine oil category is required.
Engine Oil
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
Filter
We recommend you use MOPAR® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron
rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers filtration
Fuel Filters
and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life
and reliability.
Crankcase Ven-
We recommend you use MOPAR® CCV Filter.
tilation Filter
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle.
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum)
to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specifi-
cation D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is
Fuel Selection required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged
periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel
with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from
fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-975. Pickup models, and Chassis Cab
models configured with optional B20 capability, are additionally
compatible with 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467.
MOPAR® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that
has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not
Diesel Exhaust API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage. You can
Fluid receive assistance in locating DEF in the United States by calling
866-RAM-INFO (866-726-4636). In Canada call 1–800–465–2001
(English) or 1–800–387–9983 (French).

250
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products.
Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.

Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Only use ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
(Six-Speed 68RFE) – Pickup models with- Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may
out PTO affect the function or performance of your
transmission. We recommend MOPAR®
ATF+4® fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Only use MOPAR® ASRC Automatic Trans-
(Six-Speed AS69RC) – Pickup models with mission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use
PTO, and all Chassis Cab models the proper fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR®
BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid (2500/3500) We recommend you use Synthetic, GL-5
SAE 75W-85. Limited slip additive is not
required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid (4500/5500) We recommend you use Synthetic, GL-5
SAE 75W-90. Limited slip additive is not
required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
Clutch Linkage We recommend you use MOPAR® Multi-
Purpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P. or
equivalent.
Manual Transmission (G-56) – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4®
Automatic Transmission Fluid or equiva-
lent licensed ATF+4® product.

251
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
For information on the maintenance procedures for your vehicle, please refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual or
applicable supplement on the DVD for further details.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — GASOLINE ENGINE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil
change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will
illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures,
and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” in this guide or “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
NOTE:
1500 Models Only
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles
(16,000 km) or twelve months on 1500 trucks, whichever comes first.
2500 – 3500 Models
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles
(13,000 km) or twelve months on 2500 – 3500 trucks, whichever comes first.

252
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Severe Duty All Models
• Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty
and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power
steering (2500/3500 Models Only) and automatic transmission (six-speed only)
and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required mainte-
nance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
• Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).

253
 Maintenance Chart — Gasoline Engine

254
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)

20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000

Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces.
If gear oil leakage is suspected, check
the fluid level. If using your vehicle for X X X X X X X
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing, change axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
X X X X X X X
necessary.
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Replace engine air filter. X X X X X

Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine).** X
Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine).** X
Replace spark plugs (6.4L engine).** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)

20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000

Change automatic transmission fluid and

filter(s) (six-speed automatic only), if
X
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
X
filter(s) (six-speed automatic only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change
for any of the following: police, taxi, X X
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
necessary.

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the
right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

255
 MAINTENANCE RECORD

256
Odometer Date Signature, Authorized Odometer Date Signature, Authorized
Service Center Service Center
20,000 Miles 90,000 Miles
(32,000 km) or (144,000 km) or
2 Years 9 Years
30,000 Miles 100,000 Miles
(48,000 km) or (160,000 km) or
3 Years 10 Years
40,000 Miles 110,000 Miles
(64,000 km) or (176,000 km) or
4 Years 11 Years
50,000 Miles 120,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or (192,000 km) or
5 Years 12 Years
60,000 Miles 130,000 Miles
(96,000 km) or (208,000 km) or
6 Years 13 Years
70,000 Miles 140,000 Miles
(112,000 km) or (224,000 km) or
7 Years 14 Years
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

80,000 Miles 150,000 Miles

(128,000 km) or (240,000 km) or
8 Years 15 Years
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 1500 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergencies” in this guide or
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further
information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles
(16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder and power
steering, and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.

257
 Maintenance Chart — Diesel Fuel Up To B5 Biodiesel (1500 Diesel)

258
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000

Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for po-
X X X X X X X
lice, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change the
axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter assembly. X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the
X X
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change transfer case fluid. X
 WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the
right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE — B6 TO B20 BIODIESEL (1500 DIESEL)

NOTE:
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12 875 km) or six months, whichever comes first when
using Biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
• The owner is required to monitor mileage for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change indicator system does not reflect the use
of biofuels.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

259
 Additional Maintenance Chart — B6 to B20 Biodiesel (1500 Diesel)

260
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000

Additional B6 to B20 Maintenance

Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the
right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
 MAINTENANCE RECORD

Odometer Date Signature, Authorized Odometer Date Signature, Authorized

Service Center Service Center
20,000 Miles 90,000 Miles
(32,000 km) or (144,000 km) or
2 Years 9 Years
30,000 Miles 100,000 Miles
(48,000 km) or (160,000 km) or
3 Years 10 Years
40,000 Miles 110,000 Miles
(64,000 km) or (176,000 km) or
4 Years 11 Years
50,000 Miles 120,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or (192,000 km) or
5 Years 12 Years
60,000 Miles 130,000 Miles
(96,000 km) or (208,000 km) or
6 Years 13 Years
70,000 Miles 140,000 Miles
(112,000 km) or (224,000 km) or
7 Years 14 Years
80,000 Miles 150,000 Miles
(128,000 km) or (240,000 km) or
8 Years 15 Years
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

261
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL ENGINE

CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the
vehicle.

At Each Stop For Fuel

• Check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut
off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD
or MIN mark.
Once A Month
• Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and
automatic transmission (if equipped), and add as needed.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Lubricate outer tie rod ends.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected. Retain all receipts.

Oil Change Indicator System — Cummins® Diesel

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. This system will
alert you when it is time to change your engine oil by displaying the words “Oil
Change Due” on your Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID). The oil change reminder will remind the owner to change the
engine oil every 15,000 miles or 500 hours, whichever comes first, except for the
Chassis Cab models that are using B20 biodiesel, which are 12,500 miles or
400 hours, whichever comes first. Failure to change the engine oil per the mainte-
nance schedule can result in internal engine damage.

262
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” in this guide or “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
Replace the engine oil and oil filter every 15,000 miles (24 000 km) or six months, or
sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator system. Under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
NOTE:
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) or six months or 500 Hours, whichever comes first.
• Replace the engine oil and oil filter every 12,500 miles (20 000 km) when
running B20 fuel (Chassis Cab Only).
If Chassis Cab models are operated with greater than 5% levels of Biodiesel, the oil
change interval must not exceed 12,500 miles (20 000 km) under any circum-
stances. See the Fuel Requirements section for more information regarding opera-
tion of Chassis Cab models configured for use with Biodiesel blend (B6-B20) fuel
meeting ASTM specification D-7467.

Perform Service Indicator — Cummins® Diesel

Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set interval. To help remind you
when this maintenance is due, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver information Display (DID) will display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
Service” message is displayed on the EVIC/DID it is necessary to have the emissions
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may include replacing the Closed
Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) filter element. The procedure for clearing and resetting
the “Perform Service” indicator message is located in the appropriate Service
Information.

263
 Maintenance Chart — Cummins® Diesel Engine

264
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first):

7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,000
135,000
142,500
150,000

Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

Or Kilometers:

12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
192,00

108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000

Change engine oil every 15,000 miles

(24 000 km) or six months or 500 Hours or
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
sooner if prompted by the oil change indica-
tor system, whichever comes first. **
Additional Inspections
Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
tank, refill if necessary.
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Lubricate front drive shaft fitting (4x4). X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
X X X X X X X X X X
parts for damage, wear, improper loose-
ness or end play; replace if necessary.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X

Inspect and adjust parking brake. X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as necessary. X X X X X X
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine fuel filter element. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace chassis mounted fuel filter element. X X X X X X X X X X
 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first):

7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,000
135,000
142,500
150,000

Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

Or Kilometers:

12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
192,00

108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000

Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces.

If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the
fluid level. If using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer tow-
ing change the axle fluid. *
Inspect the transfer case fluid (4x4),
change for any of the following: police, X X X X X
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid (4x4). X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
X X X X X
(AS69RC transmission only).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
X X
following: police, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing (68RFE transmission only).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
X
filter(s).
Change the manual transmission fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following: X X
police, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter
X X
(CCV).
Flush and replace power steering fluid. X
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

265
266
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first):

7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,000
135,000
142,500
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 150,000

Or Kilometers:

12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
192,00

108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000

Flush and replace engine coolant. *** X

Adjust valve lash clearance. X

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
* Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces every 20,000 miles (32,000 km). If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level.
If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change the axle fluid every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).
** Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24 000 km) or six months or 500 Hours, whichever
comes first.

CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that all cooling system service, maintenance, and repairs be performed by your local
authorized dealer.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the
right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FUSES
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery.
This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 80 Amp Black Rad Fan Control Module – If
equipped
F03 60 Amp Yellow Rad Fan – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green Compressor for Air Suspension – If
Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stabil-
ity Control Pump
F07 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue Emissions Diesel – If Equipped
(1500 LD/
Cummins Diesel)
F09 40 Amp Green Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
(Special Services
Vehicle & Cum-
mins Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
(1500 LD Diesel)
F10 40 Amp Green Body Controller / Exterior
Lighting #2
F10 50 Amp Red Body Controller / Exterior Lighting
#2 – If Equipped with Stop/Start
F11 30 Amp Pink Integrated Trailer Brake Module –
If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green Body Controller #3 / Interior Lights
F13 40 Amp Green Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green Body Controller #4 / Power Locks

267
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F15 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake Right Side – If
Equipped
F16 30 Amp Pink Smart Bar – If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue SCR – If Equipped
(1500 LD Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
(Cummins Diesel)
F20 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue Engine Control Module
30 Amp Pink
(Cummins Diesel)
F23 30 Amp Pink Body Controller #1
F24 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink Antilock Brakes/Stability Control
Module/Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If
Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If
Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle
F31 30 Amp Pink Urea Heater Control – If Equipped
(1500 LD Diesel)
F32 30 Amp Pink Drive Train Control Module – If
Equipped
F33 20 Amp Blue Special Services Vehicle Only
F34 30 Amp Pink Vehicle System Interface Module
#2 – If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster– If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 If
Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter 115V AC– If
Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink Vehicle System Interface Module
#1– If Equipped
F41 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter
F42 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
F49 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster

268
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F50 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If
Equipped
F51 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless
Ignition
F52 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights
F54 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals
F56 15 Amp Blue Additional Diesel Content – If
Equipped
F57 20 Amp Yellow Transmission
F58 20 Amp Yellow Spare Fuse
F59 10 Amp Red SCR Relay – If Equipped
F60 15 Amp Blue Underhood Lamp
F61 10 Amp Red PM Sensor – If Equipped
(1500 LD Die-
sel & Cummins
Diesel)
F62 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater
(Cummins Diesel)
F64 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F65 10 Amp Red USB interface
F66 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window
Switches / Rain Sensor
F67 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free
Module – If Equipped
F69 15 Amp Blue Mod SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) –
If Equipped
F70 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor
F71 25 Amp Clear Amplifier
F72 10 Amp Red Voltage Stabilizer Modules – If
Equipped
F73 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If
Equipped
F74 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel –
(Gas Engine & If Equipped
1500 LD
Diesel)
10 Amp Red
(Cummins
Diesel Engine)
F75 10 Amp Red Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
F76 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes/Electronic
Stability Control

269
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F77 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front
Axle Disconnect Module
F78 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric
Power Steering
F79 15 Amp Blue Clearance Lights
F80 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener /
Compass
F81 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
F82 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/
Cruise Control
F84 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
F85 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 10 Amp Red Air Suspension-If Equipped /
Trailer Tow / Steering Column
Control Module
F88 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats)
Customer Selectable
F93 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist
F96 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch
F97 25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steer-
ing Wheel – If Equipped
F98 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F99 10 Amp Red Climate Control
F100 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped
F101 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart
High Beams – If Equipped
F104 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/
Center Console)

CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in
a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

270
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

TIRE PRESSURES
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at
least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
The tire pressures recommended for your vehicle are found on the “Tire and Loading
Information” label located on the driver’s side door opening.
NOTE:
Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD
for more information regarding tire warn-
ings and instructions.

Tire And Loading Information Location

(Example)

WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure,
affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. Under-inflation
increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. Over-inflation
reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can
cause damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire pressures can cause
steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or
under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control. Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.

SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “What To Do In Emergencies” on your DVD for further information.

CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.

271
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If

Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and
function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your
vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or
on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired
(or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do
not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given
time.

WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.
Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This
spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not
the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

272
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified
by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front
or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.

WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed
listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation
pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should
be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use
oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Avoid
automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
the wheel's protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.

273
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not
approved.

Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.

Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Base Quad Headlamp – Low Beam H11LL
Base Quad Headlamp – High Beam 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Base Quad
3157NA
Headlamp)
Premium Bi Halogen Projector
HIR2LL
Headlamp - Low Beam
Premium Bi Halogen Projector
9005LL
Headlamp - High Beam
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Premium
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Headlamp)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal shape) 9145
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape) 9006
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
921K
(CHMSL)
Rear Cargo Lamp 921
LED Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
(CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp 194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) 194
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194

274
 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CHRYSLER GROUP LLC CUSTOMER CENTER

P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1–866–726–4636

CHRYSLER CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER

P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1–800–465–2001 (English)
Phone: 1–800–387–9983 (French)

ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1–800–855–0511 to connect
with a Bell Relay Service operator.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components con-
tain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in
vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.

PUBLICATIONS ORDERING
• If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimen-
tary printed copy of the Owner's Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals or Warranty
Booklet. United States customers may visit the Ram Truck Contact Us page at
www.ramtrucks.com scroll to the bottom of the page and select the “Contact Us”
link, then select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Box Material” from the left menu.
You may also obtain a complimentary copy by calling 1–866–726–4636 (U.S.) or
1–800–387–1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or DVDs or, if you prefer, additional printed copies
of the Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals may be purchased by
visiting www.techauthority.com or by calling 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or
1–800–387–1143 (Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express and Discover
orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your order, please call the above
numbers for an order form.

275
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
NOTE:
• A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/Service Manuals”, then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE UNITED STATES

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a collision or cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between
you, your authorized dealer and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor
Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
French Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere/ .

276
 MOPAR® ACCESSORIES

AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR®

• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far more than expressive style,
premium protection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing
your vehicle with accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-
approved.
• The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Ram Accessories by
Mopar® featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your Ram.
• For the full line of Authentic Ram Accessories by Mopar®, visit your local
dealership or online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian
residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
CHROME:
• Exhaust Tip • Tubular Side Steps • Fuel Filler Door
• Cast Aluminum Wheels • Front Air Deflector • Grille
• Body Side Molding

EXTERIOR:
• Bedliners • Running Boards • Bed Mat & Bed Rug
• Composite Tonneau Cover • Bed Extender • Tool Box
• Roll-up Tonneau Cover • Bed Step • Sports Performance Hood
• Folding Tonneau Cover • Hitch Receiver • Body Kit
• Molded Splash Guards • Tailgate Lock

INTERIOR:
• Premium Carpet Mats • Door Sill Guards • Slush Mats
• Ambient Light Kit • Bright Pedal Kit • Heated Seats

ELECTRONICS:
• Kicker® Sound Systems • Remote Start • Electronic Vehicle Tracking
• Mopar® Web (Wi-fi)

CARRIERS:
• Bed Mounted Bike Carrier • Cargo Bed Divider • Cargo Ramps
• Bed Mounted Ski and • Bed Mounted Cargo
Snowboard Carrier Basket With Cargo Net

Kicker® is a registered trademark of Stillwater Designs and Audio, Inc.

277
FAQ’s

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

GETTING STARTED
How do I install my LATCH Equipped Child Seat? pg. 22
How do I program my Front Seat Memory? pg. 30
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
How does the Electronic Range Select (ERS) operate? pg. 42
ELECTRONICS
Which radio is in my vehicle?
• Uconnect® 3.0 pg. 79
• Uconnect® 5.0 pg. 82
• Uconnect® 8.4A pg. 95
• Uconnect® 8.4AN pg. 126
How do I activate the Audio Jack?
• Uconnect® 3.0 pg. 81
• Uconnect® 5.0 pg. 85
• Uconnect® 8.4A pg. 101
• Uconnect® 8.4AN pg. 101
How do I set the clock on my radio?
• Uconnect® 3.0 pg. 79
• Uconnect® 5.0 pg. 83
• Uconnect® 8.4A pg. 95
• Uconnect® 8.4AN pg. 126
How do I use the Navigation feature?
• Uconnect® 8.4A pg. 104
• Uconnect® 8.4AN pg. 135
How do I pair my cell phone via Bluetooth® with the Uconnect® Hands-Free Voice
Activation System?
• Uconnect® 8.4A pg. 139
• Uconnect® 8.4AN pg. 139
How do I use my iPod®? pg. 101
How do I use my USB port to listen to audio through my touch-screen radio? pg. 101

278
 FAQ’s
OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
How do I shift into different four-wheel drive selections? pg. 158
UTILITY
How do I know how much I can tow with my Ram Truck? pg. 168
How do I adjust the gain on the Integrated Trailer Brake Module? pg. 169
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
How do I change a flat tire? pg. 211
How do I Jump-Start my vehicle? pg. 222
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Where is my Fuse Block located? pg. 267
What type of oil do I use? pg. 244
How often should I change my engine’s oil?
• Gasoline Engine pg. 252
• Cummins® Diesel Engine pg. 262
• 1500 Diesel Engine pg. 257

279
INDEX
Access Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . .252
Adding Engine Coolant Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .203
(Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Break-In Recommendations, New
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . .252 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . .35 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . .274
Air Bag Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Advanced Front Air Bag . . . . . .18
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . .17 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . .148
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Capacities, Antifreeze
Air Bag Warning Light . . . .17, 205 (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .247, 249
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Capacities, Fluid . . . . .244, 247, 249
Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Caps, Filler
Side Impacts . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Cleaner Filter) . . . . . . . . . . .252 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . .252 Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . .206
Air Conditioning . . . . .49, 50, 52, 53 Charging System Light . . . . . . . .204
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . .252 Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . .252 Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . .204
Air Suspension. . . . . . . . . . .44, 47 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm Child Restraints
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . .15 Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Disarm The System . . . . . . . .16 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . .15 Cleaning
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . .15, 207 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . .244, 252 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . .252
Capacities . . . . . . . . .247, 249 Climate Control . . . . . . . .49, 50, 52
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Cluster Warning/Indicator Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .205 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . .205
APP Brake Warning Light . . . . . . .203
Uconnect® Access . . . . . . . . .64 Front Fog Light Indicator . . . .207
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . .252 Fuel Cap/Loose Gas Cap . . . . .208
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . .201 High Beam Indicator . . . . . .207
Automatic Headlights . . . . . .38, 208 Park/Headlight ON Indicator . .207
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . .38 Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . .207
Automatic Temperature Vehicle Security Light . . . . . .207
Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Automatic Transmission Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Fluid Type . . . . . .246, 249, 251 Compact Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . .272
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . .246, 249, 251 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . .148
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . .252
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Coolant Capacity . .244, 247, 249
Charging System Light . . . . .204 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . .252
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . .252 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . .252
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .246, 249 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . .252
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .252

280
 INDEX
Points to Remember . . . . . . .252 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . .252 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . .244
Selection of Coolant Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . .222
(Antifreeze) . .244, 245, 247, 250, Malfunction Indicator
252 (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .204
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . .252 Oil . . . .244, 245, 247, 250, 252
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .39 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . .252
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Oil Selection . . . . . . . .244, 252
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . .275 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Customer Programmable Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . .230
Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . .276 Exhaust Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . .49, 50 Exhaust Regeneration . . . . . . . .179
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . .49, 50 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Diesel Engine Maintenance . .178, 190
Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . .182, 195 Filters
Diesel Fuel Water Separator. .178, 190 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Dimmer Control. . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . .178, 190
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . .201
Engine Oil . . .245, 247, 250, 252
Disarming, Security System . . . . . .16
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . .252
Disposal
Flashers
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . .252
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Electronic Range Select (ERS). .42, 43 Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . .220
Electronics Fluid, Brake. . . . . . . . . . .246, 249
Your Vehicle's Sound System . . .58 Fluid Capacities . . . . .244, 247, 249
Electronic Speed Control Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . .39 Parts . . . . . . . . . .245, 247, 250
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). .201 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 207
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . .158
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . .158
Electronic Vehicle Information Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . .229
Center (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . .148 Front And Rear ParkSense System . .54
Emergency, In Case of Front Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . .32
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . .229 Front ParkSense System. . . . . . . .54
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . .222 Fuel
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 250
Towing . . . . . . . . . . .201, 228 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . .208
Engine Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . .245
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Requirements . . . . . . . . . .244
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . .186 Tank Capacity . . . .244, 247, 249
Break-In Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Recommendations . .36, 176, 186 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . .252
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . .232 Garage Door Opener
Coolant (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .152
(Antifreeze) . . . . . .245, 247, 250 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . .252

281
INDEX
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Lights
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Engine Temperature Warning . .202
Headlights Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 High Beam Indicator . . . . . .207
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . .207
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . .38 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Lower Anchors and Tether for
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .28 CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . .21
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . .252
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . .33
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . .186 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . .252
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . .207 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . .252
High Beam/Low Beam Select Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . .252
(Dimmer) Switch . . . . . . . . . .37 Maintenance Record . . . . . .256, 261
HomeLink® (Garage Door Maintenance
Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Schedule . . . .252, 257, 262, 264
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Malfunction Indicator Light
Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .204
Manual Transmission
Idle Up Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . .246
Instrument Cluster Indicator
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . .252
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . .252 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . .252 Message Center
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls . .169 Water in Fuel . . . . . . . .177, 187
Interior and Instrument Lights . . .7, 59 MOPAR® Accessories. . . . . . . . .277
Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . .252
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . .37 Navigation. . . . . . . . . . . .104, 135
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 New Vehicle Break-In
In Vehicle Features Period . . . . . . . . . .36, 176, 186
Uconnect® Access . . . . . . . . .69
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . .155 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . .206, 262
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . .206
Oil, Engine . . . . .245, 247, 250, 252
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Capacity . . . . . . .244, 247, 249
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Change Interval . . . . . . . . .252
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .15 Filter . . . . . .245, 247, 250, 252
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . .16 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . .252
Keyless Enter-N-Go. . . . . . . . . . .13 Materials Added to . . . . . . . .252
Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Recommendation . . . . .244, 252
Starting/Stopping . . . . . . . . .14 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . .244, 252
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . .252
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . .37 Outlet
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . .37 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

282
 INDEX
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . .208 Schedule, Maintenance . . . .252, 257
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . .252
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Seat Belts
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . .16
ParkSense® System, Front And Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . .16
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Seat Belt Warning . . . . . . . . .17
ParkSense® System, Rear . . . . . . .54 Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . .35 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Perform Service Indicator, Reset . .263 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . .29
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Placard, Tire and Loading Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . .267 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . .15
Glass Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . .56 Disarm The System . . . . . . . .16
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .15
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Selection of Coolant
Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 (Antifreeze) . . . . . .245, 247, 250
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Set Up Your Via Mobile Profile
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . .55 Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . .246 Shifting
Preparation for Jacking. . . . . . . .211 Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Programmable Electronic Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . .173
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Transfer Case, Shifting out of
Purchase Apps Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . .174
Uconnect® Access . . . . . . . . .65 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . .225
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . .37, 207
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . .37 SIRIUS Travel Link . . . . . . . . . .138
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .272, 273
Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . .33 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Rear ParkSense System. . . . . .54, 55 Speed Control
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . .170 Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Shifting into Transfer Case Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .39
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Starting
Shifting out of Transfer Case Cold Weather . . . . . . . .177, 187
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Starting Procedures
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (Diesel Engines). . . . . . .176, 186
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .15 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . .16 System Controls . . . . . . . . . .147
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . .15 Stuck, Freeing. . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Replacement Bulbs. . . . . . . . . .274 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Reporting Safety Defects. . . . . . .276 Supplemental Restraint System -
Resetting Perform Service Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . .229 Temperature Control, Automatic
(ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

283
INDEX
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . .22 Uconnect® 8.4AN . . . . . . . . . .126
Tires Uconnect® Access . . . . . . . . . . .61
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .271 APP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 In Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . .69
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . .272 Purchase Apps . . . . . . . . . . .65
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . .211 Uconnect® Voice Command . .88, 111
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Using Access
Pressure Warning Light . . . . .201 Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Tow/Haul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . .225
Vehicle Security Alarm Disarming . .16
Towing
Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . .228
Via Mobile Apps
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .170
Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Towing Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Voice Command . . . . . . . . .88, 111
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Voice Recognition
Trailer Towing System (VR) . . . . . . . . . .88, 111
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . .168
Transfer Case Washer
Fluid . . . . . . . . .246, 249, 251 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .252
Transmission Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .37
Fluid . . . . . .246, 249, 251, 252 Washing Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . .252
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .252 Water in Fuel . . .177, 178, 187, 190
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .206 Water Separator, Diesel
Turbo Cool Down . . . . . . . .180, 194 Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 190
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . .37, 207 Water Separator Draining . . .178, 190
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . .252
Uconnect® Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . .252, 273
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Set Up Your Via Mobile Profile . .64 Wheel Nut Torque. . . . . . . . . . .219
Using Access . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Via Mobile Apps . . . . . . . . . .78 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . .37
Uconnect® 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . .252
Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . .37
Uconnect® 8.4A . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . .252

284
NOTES

285
NOTES

286
NOTES

287
NOTES

288
 If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s acquainted with your new RAM and to provide a
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals or Warranty Booklet convenient reference source for common questions.
by calling 1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
by contacting your dealer.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please consult

IMPORTANT your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® Manuals and

This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

important features of your vehicle. The DVD enclosed Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your
contains your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect® vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help
Manuals, Warranty Booklets, Tire Warranty and Roadside personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
Assistance (new vehicles purchased in the U.S.) or Roadside www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local RAM dealer.
Assistance (new vehicles purchased in Canada) in electronic
format. We hope you find it useful. Replacement DVD kits
may be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Copyright 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes
of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a
personal injury. Chrysler Group LLC strongly recommends that the driver use
extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or
off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, use public transportation.
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision.
WARNING
Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. Never drink and then drive.

1905562_15a_RAM_1500_2500_3500_UG_103114.indd 2 10/31/14 1:37 PM

 Download a FREE electronic copy of the Owner’s Manual
and Warranty Booklet by visiting:

WWW.RAMTRUCKS.COM/EN/OWNERS/MANUALS OR
WWW.RAMTRUCKS.COM/EN/WARRANTY (U.S.);
WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA/EN (CANADA).

15D241-926-AA
RAM TRUCKS 1500/2500/3500
SECOND REV 1 EDITION
USER GUIDE

1905562_15a_RAM_1500_2500_3500_UG_103114.indd 1 10/31/14 1:37 PM